Skip to main content

Full text of "The Adayar Library Bullettin, Vol. II February"

See other formats


BRAHMAV1DYA 

THE 

ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 




THE ADYAR LIBRARY 



director : Dr. G. Srinivasa Mum. B.A.. B.L.. M.B.&C.M., 

Vaidyaralna 

t. Director and Curator for IVcstcrn Section : 

A. J. Humcnrter 
. Ufa /or for Eastern Section : 

I’rol. C. Kunlun Kaja. M.A., D.l’hil. (Oxon.) 



BRAHMA VI DY A 

THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 

Editor Pkoi. Kunhan Raia. M.A.. D.Piiil. (Oxon.) 
•I»»r. Editor A N. Kkbiina Aiyanuau. M.A.. L.T. 

Hates of Subscription . 

Life SubtMiiiriion Us. 100 
or * 50 
o. i 10 



India A Ceylon 
U. S. A 
Kutisli Enipin' 
Oiliei Countm** 



Per Annum 
K*. 6 
* i 
SI.. I.’ 
Kh '> 



Suicle Copy 



Us. 2 -H 

J 1.25 
Sh 5 
Kb i-H 



All Lomm urinations to be aJJicsscJ to : 



The Dikectoh. 

Adyur Library, 

Adyar, Madras S.. India. 





BRAHMAVIDYA 



THE 

ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 

RAMA VARMA RESEARCH UIGTITUTE. 

TRICHUR. COCHIN STATE. 

tfNitarlW I 



Unto him who approaches in due form, whose mind is serene 
and who has attained calmness, the wise one teaches in its very 
truth that Brahmavidya whereby one knows the Imperishable, 
the Punisha, the Truth. 




Vol II Part 



February. 1938 




CONTENTS 



Pack 

Editorial Notes ....... 1 

Address of Col. H. S. Olcott, at the Opening Ceremony of ilie 

Adyar Library on 28th December 1885 . .9 

Serial Publications ; 

RuvodavyilchyS MadhavakpS. Edited by Prof. C. Kunhan 

Raja, M.A.. D.Phil. (Oxon.) . . . 153-176 

The Yoga- Upacisads. Translated by Paiydit S- Subiahmaijya 
S'istri, P. T. S. and T. R. ^rtnivSsa Ayyangir, 

B.A., L.T. 89-120 

Samavedasanihita with the Commentaries of Madhava and 
Bharatasv&rain. Edited by Prof. C. Kuuhaa Raja, 

M.A., D.Phil. (Oxon.) .... i-vili, 1-24 
Bhavasankranti SEtra and NSg3rjuna's BhavasanlcrSnd 
SSstra with the Commentary' of Maitreyanfitha. Edited 
by N. Aiyaswami Sastri . . . 61-76 

A*\alfiyaisag|hyasulra with DevasvhmibhSsya. Edited by 

Prof. C. Kunhan Raja, M.A., D.Phil. (Oxon.) . 9-24 

Manuscripts Notes : 

III. The Ai/valayanagrliyaniantrabh&sya — Dr. C. Kunhan 



Raja 17 

Reviews ........ 25 

Our Exchanges ....... 35 




EDITORIAL NOTES 



It is with a sense of deserved pride and gratification 
that we issue the first part of the second volume of 
the Bulletin of the Adyar Library. We have every 
reason to feel satisfied with the success of the Bulletin 
for the first year and for the progress that has been 
made during this one year. We have given full notes 
on some very important manuscripts in the Adyar 
Library. We have also published portions of some 
very important works. One work we have been able 
to issue in full. In our review columns we have noticed 
some recent publications. 

During the first year more than sixty journals have 
offered to be on exchange relation with the Bulletin and 
among them there are a few that are of international 
reputation. Thus even in the first year, the Bulletin has 
been given a recognised position among the Oriental 
Journals. Although the Journal is young, the Adyar 
Library has, during the last fifty yeafs, established a 
great name ; and the Bulletin starts its life with all the 
growth of the Library transfused into it 

We have about a hundred subscribers on our list, 
which, we are sure will increase in course of time. Even 
before the Bulletin was started there was the Adyar 
Library Association and this Association has about fifty 




2 



THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



members. When the Bulletin was started, about fifty 
persons had enrolled themselves as subscribers besides 
the members of the Association (whose subscription 
includes also the subscription for the Bulletin). We 
have to note specially that Mr. A. J. Hamerster the 
Jt Director and Curator of the Western Section of 
the Library has become a life subscriber of the 
Bulletin. We hope that other persons will follow this 
magnificent lead. 

For the success of the Bulletin during the first 
year we are indebted to Mr. A. N. Krishna Ayyangar, 
M.A., L.T., who is now associated with the Adyar 
Library and also with the Bulletin as its Assistant 
Editor. He is a graduate of the Madras University and 
had a good training in higher studies and researches 
in the Department of Indian History and Archaeology 
of the Madras University. He is also associated with 
Rao Bahadur K. V. Rangaswami Ayyangar in his 
literary works. We haw found him a real acquisition 
in managing this Bulletin. 

Prof. F. O. Schrader of Kiel University has con- 
tributed an article in the very first issue of this Bulletin 
and he has all along shown a keen interest in the 
progress of the Bulletin. He was formerly the Director 
of the Adyar Library and as such his connection with 
this Bulletin is much more intimate than that of other 
scholars. We are deeply indebted to him for the keen 
interest he is taking. 

Pandit S. Subrahmanya Sastri and T. R. Srinivasa 
Ayyangar have been helping us by translating the 




EDITORIAL NOTES 



3 



Minor Upanisads into English. A good portion of the 
translation we published in the first three issues of 
the first volume and the entire translation of the 
Yoga-Upanisaas will soon appear a3 a separate book. 
Pandit N. Ayyaswami is working on the Buddhistic 
Literature in the Library. He is an eminent Pandit 
who, later, had a training in the study of Chinese and 
Tibetan under the late Prof. Sylvain Levi at Shanti- 
niketan and continued his studies at Shantiniketan 
for some time under the guidance of Pandit Vidhu- 
shekhara Bhattacharya who is now Sir Asutosh 
Mukerjee Professor in the Calcutta University. He is 
regularly contributing articles connected with Bud- 
dhistic Literature in Tibetan and Chinese. 

Dr. V. Rag ha van has been regularly contributing 
to the Bulletin giving valuable information regarding 
works and authors. He is a young scholar with a 
bright future before him. After graduating from the 
Madras University he received training in research 
methods in the University. Later he took a doctorate 
also from the University. Now he is connected with 
the preparation of the Catalogus Catalogorum in the 
Madras University. 

The MelaiSgamalika of Mahavaidyanatha S’ivan 
is a very important work on South Indian Music. There 
is a work called the SafigrahacG<i5mapi by Govinda 
where there is a theory portion and also an illustrative 
portion containing seventy-two song3 corresponding to 
the seventy-two main ragas along with illustrative 
songs for the derivative rffgas. The theory of Govinda 




4 



THE ADVAE LIBRARY BULLETIN 



differs from the theory of Vcnkatamakhin found in his 
Calurdandiprakas'ika. MahSvaidyanStha Si van follows 
the theory of Govinda and has composed seventy-two 
songs to illustrate the seventy-two main ragas. This 
work has now been published in the last three parts of 
the first volume. The Rgvcda commentary of Madhava 
along with the commentary of another Madhava who 
is the son of VeAkatarya (the latter published only for 
the sake of comparison) is progressing. 

We were not able to continue the publication of 
the Ss'valSyanagfhyasutra with the commentary of 
Dcvasvamin. There is a manuscript of it in the 
Calcutta Sanskrit College and we have now secured a 
certified transcript of it from the Library of that 
college. There is another copy of it in the Palace of 
H. H. the Maharaja of Travancore. We have secured 
a transcript of that also. We had to let the publica- 
tion lie over till we received these transcripts. It has 
been found that the manuscript of Trivandrum 
differs considerably from the manuscripts secured in 
North India. The difference is of such a great 
magnitude that we are not able to incorporate the 
readings found in this manuscript as foot-notes in the 
publication. Still the maunscript is a copy of Devas- 
vSmin's commentary. The colophons say so. It is 
a different recension. Wc will give some further 
information on this manuscript at some later stage. 

We have issued a small portion (64 pages) of 
Vyavaharaniraaya of Varadaraja edited by Rao Baha- 
dur K. V. Rangaswami Ayyangar and Mr. A. N. Krishna 




EDITORIAL NOTES 5 

Ayyangar. This is only as an announcement or as a 
sample. The work will soon appear in book form. 

This year we are beginning a new work, namely 
SamavedasarphitS with two pre-SSyaiia commentaries. 
Neither of them has till now been published. The 
commentary of BharatasvSmin is well known. But 
the commentary of Madhava is not so well known. 
Not much information is also available regarding this 
commentary, its author and its date. Rajendralal 
Mitra in his Catalogue of the Manuscripts in the 
Palace of H.H. the Maharaja of Bikaner calls it a 
dissertation on the Samaveda and Winternitz and Keith 
in their Catalogue of the Bodlein Manuscripts suggest 
that this MSdhava may be identical with the Madhava 
mentioned by SSyaija. 

The Adyar Library has one of the best collections 
of Sanskrit MSS. in the world. For some time now 
we have not been able to make any organised collection 
of MSS., though there is still scope for making good 
collections of rare and valuable MSS. In the field 
of Vedic Literature and in Philosophy we have recently 
acquired some rare works. We propose to make some 
regular arrangement to collect MSS. 

We have taken up a scheme of preparing a 
descriptive catalogue of the manuscripts in the Library. 
It is true that there are good descriptive catalogues 
of manuscripts in the other Libraries and as such 
a description of the manuscripts in this Library may 
not be of much use. There are the descriptive catalogues 
of the Government Oriental Manuscripts Library and 




6 



THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



of the Tanjore Palace Library. The number of works 
of which there arc manuscripts in the Library and for 
which there is no manuscript in the other Libraries 
is very small. Still there is a use for such a descriptive 
catalogues in so far as it serves as a record of the collec- 
tion. Further, there are some works on which it is 
possible to give fuller information. There is no 
intention of duplicating information. We have ap- 
pointed a young scholar for the purpose. His name 
is Madhava Krishna Sarma. He has taken a Title 
and a Certificate in the Faculty of Oriental Learning 
in the Madras University and he had training in 
research methods in the Sanskrit Department of the 
Madras University. 

In this connection we have to make note of the 
New Catalogus Catalogorum prepared by the Madras 
University. A provisional sample has been recently 
published covering thirty-four pages. There is also a 
short Preface by the Editor in chief, Mahamahopadh- 
yaya Prof. S- Kuppuswami Sastri. The name of 
persons and institutions that have helped the under- 
taking is also given. The Catalogues utilised for pre- 
paring the great work is also given in a list. The list 
is very long and shows the real need for such a work. 
The Madras University has undertaken a really import- 
ant work and from the provisional fasciculus, one can 
reasonably hope that in the final shape the work will 
satisfy the needs of scholars by presenting accurate 
and reliable information regarding the manuscripts in 
the various public and private collections. 




EDITORIAL NOTES 



7 



The Christmas season in India is always marked 
by various Conferences and Congresses. We arc 
interested only in three out of this multiplicity of meet- 
ings all over India; we mean the All India Library 
Conference held in Delhi, the Philosophical Conference 
held at Nagpur and the Oriental Conference held at 
Trivandrum. Considering the large number of Oriental 
Libraries in India, there is a real need for an organisa- 
tion that will bring together all the Oriental Libraries 
of India. This can be an independent organisation 
or it can be a section of either the Library Conference 
or of the Oriental Conference. This is a matter which 
must be seriously taken up. We were not able to take 
up the question in the Library Conference till now. 

The Oriental Libraries Section of the Association 
can do a great amount of help to scholars. In the 
matter of the organisation of Oriental Libraries, there 
is a good deal of scope for improvement. In many 
of the Libraries, the rules are extremely strict and the 
contents of the Libraries become practically useless to 
scholars. Many of them do not lend manuscripts out- 
side the Library ; and in the Library itself, the arrange- 
ment for scholars to sit and work is extremely meagre. 
Further, in India facilities for supplying photograph 
copies of MSS. are also not available. These factors 
create much inconvenience to scholars. This is a 
serious matter which either the Library Conference or 
the Oriental Conference can take up ; and for this it 
will be a good thing if an Oriental Libraries section 
is started within one or other of these two organisations. 




8 



THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



Regarding the Oriental Conference, we have only 
one suggestion to make and that is that the All-India 
Oriental Conference must make some arrangement to 
invite the International Congress of Orientalists to hold 
one of their sessions in India. We fully recognise the 
difficulties of the European scholars to attend the 
session if it is held in India considering the heavy 
expenditure that will be involved in a journey to India. 
If the governing body of the All-India Oriental Con- 
ference takes up the matter seriously, I am sure that 
the traditional hospitality of India and the liberality of 
the Indian Princes and Chicfsand other rich people will 
come in to the solve the problem of money. During the 
current year, Prof. F. W. Thomas is the President of 
the All-India Oriental Conference and he is also very 
intimately connected with the International Congress. 
We hope that the Governing-body of the All-India 
Oriental Conference will take up the matter. 

Regarding the Indian Philosophical Conference, 
wc arc very much interested in the progress of that 
body. Study of Philosophy has fallen into a plight 
in India. India has been the home of Philosophy and 
it is hoped that through the efforts of this organisation 
the study of Philosophy will revive in India and will 
be raised to a position of deserved eminence. 




ADDRESS OF COL. H. S. OLCOTT 



President- Founder of The Theosophical Society 

(at tbo Opening Coiomony ot tho Adyar Library on 28th 
December 1836) 

{From the Madras Mail of 2S-1HSSS, 

We are met together, Ladies and Gentlemen, upon 
an occasion that is likely to possess an historical 
interest in the world of modern culture. The founda- 
tion of a Library of such a character as this is among 
the rarest of events, if, indeed, it be not unique in 
modem times. We need not enumerate the great 
Libraries of Western cities, with their millions of 
volumes, for they are rather huge storehouses of books ; 
nor the collections of Oriental literature at the India 
Office, and in the Royal and National Museums of 
Europe; nor even the famed Saraswati Mahal, of 
Tanjorc ; all these have a character different from the 
Adyar Library, and do not compete with it. Ours has 
a definite purpose behind it, a specific line of utility 
marked out for it from the beginning. It ts to be an 
adjunct to the work of The Theosophical Society ; a 
means of helping to effect the object for which the 




10 



THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



Society was founded, and which is dearly stated in 
its constitution. Of the three declared aims of our 
Society, the first is : 

"To form the nucleus of a Universal Brotherhood 
of Humanity, without distinction of race creed or 
colour: " 

The second — “ To promote the study of Aryan 
and other Eastern literatures, religions and sciences." 

The first is the indispensable antecedent to the 
second, as the latter is the logical consequence of the 
former. It would be impracticable to bring about 
friendly co-operation by the learned of the several 
ancient faiths and races, for the study of comparative 
religion and archaic philosophy and science, without 
first getting them to consent to work in mutual kindliness ; 
and on the other hand, the establishment of this fraternal 
spirit would naturally stimulate research into the re- 
cords of the past, to discover, if possible, the basis of 
religious thought and human aspiration. Strife comes 
of mutual misunderstanding and prejudice, as unity 
results from the discovery of basic truth. Our Society 
is an agency of peace and enlightenment, and in found- 
ing this Library it is but carrying oat its policy of 
universal good-will. Our last thought is to make it a 
literary godown, a food-bin for the nourishment of white 
ants, a forcing-bed for the spores of mildew and mould. 
We want, not so much number of books, as books of 
useful sort for our purposes. We wish to make it a 
monument of ancestral learning, but of the kind that is 
of the most practical use to the world. We do not desire 




ADDRESS OF COL. H. S. OLCOTT 11 

to crowd our shelves with tons of profitless casuistical 
speculations, but to gather together the best religious, 
moral and philosophical teachings of the ancient sages. 
We aim to collect, also, whatever can be found in the 
literature of yore upon the laws of nature, the princi- 
ples of science, the rules and processes of useful arts. 
Some Aryaphiles are thoroughly convinced that the 
forefathers had rummaged through the whole domain 
of human thought, had formulated all philosophical 
problems, sounded all depths and scaled all heights of 
human nature, and discovered most, if not all, hidden 
properties of plants and minerals and laws of vitality ; 
we wish to know how much of this is true. There are 
some so ignorant of the facts as to affirm their disbelief 
in the learning of the ancients, and the value of the 
contents of the old books. To them, the dawn of human 
wisdom is just breaking, and in the Western sky. Two 
centuries ago — as Flammarion tells us — the Jesuits 
Schiller and Bayers proposed to have the stars and 
constellations rc-christened with Christian instead of 
Pagan names : and the Sun was to be called Christ ; 
the Moon, Mary Virgin ; Saturn, Adam ; Jupiter, Moses ; 
etc. etc. ; the orbs would have shone none the less 
brightly and sectarianism would have been gratified ! 
In something of the same spirit, some of our improved 
Aryans seem disposed to obliterate the good old orbs 
of knowledge and set up new ones — putting out Vyasa, 
Manu, Kapila and Patanjali, the Aryan luminaries, 
and lighting up Compte, Haeckel, Huxley, Spencer 
and Mill. It would not bo so reprehensible if they 




12 



THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



would be content to see all great and shining lights 
. . . . admitted to that oqual sky." 

We are all for progress and for reform, no doubt, 
but it is yet to be proved that it is a good plan to throw 
away a valuable patrimony to clutch at a foreign legacy. 
For my part, I cannot help thinking that if our clever 
graduates knew as much about Sanskrit, Zend and Pali 
literature as they do of English, the Rishis would have 
more, and modern biologists less, reverence. Upon 
that impression, at any rate, this Adyar Library is 
being founded. 

With the combined labour of Eastern and Western 
scholars, we hope to bring to light and publish much 
valuable knowledge now stored away in the ancient 
languages, or, if rendered into Asiatic vernaculars, 
still beyond the reach of the thousands of earnest 
students who are only familiar with the Greek and 
Latin classics and their European derivative tongues. 
There is a widespread conviction that many excellent 
secrets of chemistry, metallurgy, medicine, industrial 
arts, meteorology, agriculture, animal breeding and 
training, architecture, engineering, botany, mineralogy, 
astrology, etc., known to former generations, have been 
forgotten, but may be recovered from their literary 
remains. Some go so far as to affirm that the old sages 
had a comprehensive knowledge of the law of human 
development, based upon experimental research. I 
confess that I am one of such, and that I am more and 
more persuaded that the outcome of modern biological 




ADDRESS OF COL. H. S. OLCOTT 



13 



research will be the verification of the Secret, or 
Esoteric, Philosophy. 

This firm conviction has made me sc anxious to 
begin, as soon as possible, while we are in health and 
strength, the gathering together of the present Library, 
and it shall not be my fault if it does not achieve its 
object within the life-time of the majority of the 
present audience. If the ancient books are as valuable 
as some allege, the sooner we prove it the better ; if 
they are not, we cannot discover the fact too speedily 
That intellectual marvel of our times, Sir William 
Jones, had a better opinion of the merit of Sanskrit 
literature than our improved Aryans, it would appear. 
" I can venture to affirm,” says he in his Discourse 
before the Asiatic Society, delivered at Calcutta, 
February, 20th, 1794 — “ I can venture to affirm without 
meaning to pluck a leaf from the never-fading laurels 
of our immortal Newton, that the whole of his theo- 
logy and part of his philosophy, may be found in the 
Vedas and even in the works of Sufis. The most subtle 
spirit which he suspected to pervade natural bodies, 
and lying concealed in them, to cause attraction and 
repulsion ; the emission, reflection, and refraction of 
light, electricity, caiefaction, sensation, and muscular 
motion ; is described by the Hindus as a fifth element, 
endued with those very powers ; and the Vedas abound 
with allusions to a force universally attractive, which 
they chiefly ascribe to the Sun, thence called Aditya, 
or the Attractor.” Of Sri Sankara’s commentary' 
upon the Vedanta, he says that " it is not possible to 




14 



THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



Speak with too much applause of so excellent a work, 
and 1 am confident in asserting that, until an accurate 
translation shall appear in some European language, 
the general history of Philosophy must remain in- 
complete : and he further affirms that "one correct 
version of any celebrated Hindu book will be of greater 
value than all the dissertations or essays that could be 
composed on the same subject." An entire Upanishad 
is devoted to the description of the internal parts of 
the body, an enumeration of the nerves, veins and 
arteries ; a description of the heart, spleen and liver, 
and of pre-natal development of the embryo. If you 
will consult the most recent medical authorities, you 
will find the very remarkable fact,— one recently 
brought to my notice by a medical member of our 
Society — that the course of the sushumna or spinal 
tube, which, according to the Aryan books, connects 
the various chakrams, or psychic evolutionary centres 
in the human body can be traced from the brain to the 
os coccyx ; in fact, my friend has kindly shown me a 
section of it under a strong lens. Who knows, then, 
what strange biological and psychical discoveries may 
he waiting to crown the intelligent researches of the 
modem anatomist and physiologist who is not above 
consulting the Aryan text books ? " There are not in 
any language (save the ancient Hebrew)," says Sir 
William Jones, 11 more pious and sublime addresses to 
the Being of beings, more splendid enumerations of 
his attributes, or more beautiful descriptions of his 
visible works, than in Arabic, Persian and Sanskrit." 




ADDKKSK OK COL. II. S. OLCOTT 



15 



But the theme is inexhaustible, and I resist the tempta- 
tion to collate the many accessible testimonies of some 
of the greatest scholars of our own time to the richness, 
value, and interest of the ancient books of Asia. In 
Europe and America these profound students and 
thinkers are working patiently, in sympathetic collabora- 
tion with colleagues, Asiatic and European, in India, 
Ceylon, Burma, Japan, China, Egypt, Assyria and 
other Eastern countries. We arc honoured this evening 
with the presence of some of these public benefactors, 
and 1 would that to their more practised hands had 
been confided the duty 1 am now officially performing. 
It will be for the learned gentleman (Pandit Bhashya 
Charyar) who is to follow me, to express in Sanskrit 
language the interest felt by all die promoters of the 
Adyar Library in the success of the work to which 
they are devoting their time and talent 

You will observe, Ladies and Gentlemen, from 
what precedes, that the Library we arc now founding 
is neither meant to lie a mere repository of books, nor 
a training school for human parrots, who, like modern 
pandits, mechanically learn their thousands of verses 
and lacs of lines without being able to explain, or per- 
haps even understand, the meaning ; nor an agency to 
promote the particular interests of some one faith or 
sectarian sub-division of the same; nor as a vehicle 
for the vain display of literary proficiency. Its object 
is to help to revive Oriental literature ; to re-establish 
the dignity of the true pandit, mobed, bhikshu and 
maulvi : to win the regard of educated men, especially 




16 



THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



that of the rising generation, for the sages of old, their 
teachings, their wisdom, their noble example ; to assist, 
as far as may be, in bringing about a more intimate 
relation, a better mutual appreciation between the 
literary workers of the two hemisphere. Our means are 
small but sincere motive and patient industry may offset 
that in time, and we trust to deserve public confidence. 

And now, before closing, permit me one moment 
to annouce that the entire MSS. of the first five volumes 
that Madame Blavatsky is now writing upon the Secret 
Doctrine, is in my hands ; and that even a cursory 
reading has satisfied better critics than myself that it 
will be one of the most important contributions ever 
made to philosophical and scientific scholarship, a 
monument of the learned author, and a distinction to 
the Adyar Library, of which she is one of the founders'. 
» • • • • 

On behalf of the subscribers to the Library* 
Fund, and of the General Council of The Theosophical 
Society, I invoke upon this undertaking the blessing 
of all Divine powers and of all other lovers of truth, 
1 dedicate it to the service of mankind, and I now 
declare it founded and duly opened. 



' From tM». It would appear that, * (cording to the original plan ol 
Col. OJcott. the then President of The Thcoaophical Society, the Secret 
Doctrine was to have been brought out as a publication of the Adyar 
Library. 80 that, if our pmcat President bad not decided that the T. P. H. 
should take up the reapooBlbllity of publishing, by August new. on odition 
of the Secret Doctrine according to the orgjnal MSS. referred to above 

X Col. Olcott, it would bare been the duty of the Adyar Library to 
r to undertake the responsibility, oi an aci of homage to Col. Otcoet 
and Madam Blavaiaky, the Co-founders of The Thcoaophical Society as 
well as of the Adyar Library.— G.S.M. 




MANUSCRIPTS NOTES 

ill 

this asvalAyanagi<hyamantrabhasya 

By I>k. C. Kuniian kaja 

TBBRB is n pedni leaf manuscript of a work called the Aj/valByana- 
gfhyamantrabhafya in which the mantras occurring :n the AaValBynn*- 
grhyasUtrn aro commented upon. This is contained in the same 
bundle in which the manuscript of the VSiarjcaoiaiktosamuccaya 
(described in tho manuscript i Kites I in Parts 1 and 3 of the first 
volume of the Bulletin) is also included. It bears the shelf No. 
XIX. G. 72. There is n transcript of it in the Library which 
bears the shelf No. XXXVIII. H. 14. For the sake of easy 
reference all the page Nos. in tills note are from the transcript. 
The manuscript is incomplete and contains nearly 1500 granthaa. 

The work opens thus : 
flrfvnlftyanagrhyoktapakayajEesu karmasu 
mantraOam viniyuktSnam vyakhyanani kriyate 'dhuni 
atyactHni duruktUni y&ny anuklSni ca sphujam 
s&mfldadhatu vidvirpsas tfini sarvaijl buddhibhitt. 

The manuscript ends: viYvasya ca duritasya yakjmanimit- 
tasya pSram nayati tatha ahoramlti. s’atam jlva. yak&n)flg[h!tam 
prati ucyale. bo yak?min tvam yalcsmiijo muktat) uparyupari 
vardhamSnah evam s'ata. Here the manuscript breaks. 

This is the end of the commentary on R.V. 10. 161.3 and the 
beginning of the commentary on R.V. 10. 161.4. This sCkta, 
namely, 10. 161 is mentioned in the 5th sDtra of the 6th kha^dika 
of the 3rd chapter in As-valSymutgtfcyasDtra. The previous sCtra 
is: atha vySthitasyBrarasya yakjmagrhltasya va §a#thutib and 
the 5th sutra is muHcfimi tv5 hax-isa jivanBya kam ityctena. 




18 



THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



Bui the manuscript is not continuous. There are some breaks 
and some repetitions; there is some extra matter also in the 
middle. The manuscript proceeds continuously without a break 
up to P. 177 where there is a break. The last portion before the 
break is as follows : ekam eva udakam idam car&car&tmalcam 
jagat. kill ca sarvam vibabhuva. vltyayara upasargab ud ityetuya 
sthfloe blmati. samarthyad artarWiavitaijyarlhab. udbhavayati. 
utpftdayatity arthab- This it the commentry on R.V. 8. 58. 2 
(V&lakhilya). R.V. 8. 58- 1 and 2 are referred to in sUtra 6 of 
section 23 in the tint chapter of A^valftyanngrhyasulra, which runs: 
sadasyam saptadas’am kaujiukinab samamananti sa karmagam 
u pad ra^JS bliavatiti tad uktam rebhyam yam rtvijo bahudhfi 
kalpayanta ill. 

Here there is a break and after the break there is a small 
repetition. Pp. 144, 145 and half of 146 are repeated. After the 
repetition, there is some matter which does not belong to the work. 
The matter consists of some stanzas ; tbc first is : 
tripatak&kareqdnyan apnvaryantara poram 
anenfimaotraijam yet syit taj janante janllntikam. 

There are 10 verses and a half. It closes : 

uktinuktaduruktadiciota yatra pravartate 
v&rtikam tad iti prahur vartikajBS manl§igab 

After this what beg: ns is: atha pitrmedhamantia vyikhyiyanto. 
prftpyaitam bhamibhagam prokpiti. apeta. ye 'tra pErvam nivasatha 
pretadayab te yGyam atab sthanad apeta. This is the commentary 
on R. V. 10. 14. 9. It is referred to in satra !0 of the second 
khaitfiki of the fourth chapter of AsValSyanagihyasutra, which 
runs: prSpyaivam bhilmtbhflgam kartodakooa s'amis'akhaya trib 
prasavyam Byatanam parivrajan proksaty apeta vita vi ca sarpala iti. 

From here the manuscript runs oo to page 208 where there 
is again a break. What ends just before the break is: asmin 
kusumbhara bhuniau nidadhiti upasarpa. pfitpsubblb kumhham 
pracchadsyati ucchva&casva. pracch&dya pathati ucchavRcamS- 
nili. kapalena kumhham pidadhati ut tc stablinfirai. catasro 'pi 




MANUSCRIPTS NOTIIS 



19 



dahynmanSnumantrarni gatab kumWsigntc •jahiriipe ynj:unllne 
yoiyM*- This *" ,lhI "f tlm fifth klunjdikii of the fourth 

chapter of the A'.'tfalaynn.'urfhyasittr.i and the maiitm* arc tt. V. 
10 IS. 10, II, 12 and 13. 

What begins niter the Incnk is: bmhmnynjitc praiyavnvyii- 
hrtisavitryor gntiih iiaridhBnlyftb name hrahmaije. brahma camrm- 
ukliab. This rcfors toompurva vyiihitih, which is the 3rd siitra of the 
third khaijdika of tho third arlhyiiya in the As’ valayan, Taliyas dtra. 
After this tliere is no Iwmk in the manuscript. 

From tins it is dear that tho originnl palm leaf manuscript 
has its sheets misplaced. As a matter of fact, this palm leaf manus- 
cript consists of loaves found in a stray heap aud strung together. 
The copy was made from the leaves put in wrong ordor. The 
manuscript contains tho following portions : 

(1) From tho beginning to A.G.S. 1. 23. 5 (P. 177) 

(2) From A.G.S. 3.3.3 to A.G.S. 3. 6. 5. (P. 209 to P. 232) 

(3) From A.G.S. 4. 2. 10 to A.G.S. 4. 5. 8. (P. 183 to 

P.208) 

There is nothiog in this manuscript to serve as evidence in 
fixing the authorship of this commentary. There is a statement 
on P. 209 which runs as: ayaxn react ro na bhavati iti grhya- 
vyikhy&ne vayain avoefima. This shows that the author of this 
commentary has written a commentary oa tho Gpiyasu'ra also 
apart from this commentary’ on tho mantras occurring in tho 
Gfhyasutrar.. The commentaries on the As'valfiyacjLgxhyasQna 
of NSrHynna, Devasvfimin and Haradatta are well known. As 
a matter of fact the statement occurs in the commentary of 
HaradatU published in the Trivandrum Sanskrit Series on P. 144 
under 3. 3. 2. This is enough to settle the authorship of tho 
commentary. 

There are two manuscripts of the same work in the Govern- 
ment Oriental Manuscripts Library, Madras, R. 4193 and R. 4482. 
They are transcripts from two different palm leaf manuscripts 
bclonffinff to different owners. But one is found to be a 




20 



THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



continuation o( the other. One ends: atha asjakayah pmdapitrya- 
jflaprnkrtitvat pii^dapitryajRamantr&t) flkrsya vySkhyflyantc. The 
other begins with the same sentence. The fact might be that in 
the second of the two manuscripts, there may have been some 
portion earlier than this, but the authorities of the Library took 
the transcript only from the portion where the other ended. This 
is only my conjecture. I tried to get at the orgmal ; but 1 have 
not been successful till now. At the end of chapters in the second 
manuscript there are the colophons: iti haradattaviracitc gfhya- 
mintravyakhane dvittyo ‘dhyayab- ill haradattamis'raviracitc 
aVvalayanaBlhyamantravySkhyane trtlyo 'dhyfiyab- iti haradatta- 
viracitSySra as'valayanagrh,7imiintravyakhyayfim caturtho ’dhyiyab 
samiptab. These colophons also prove that the commentator is 
Maradatta. There is no colophon in tbo Adyar Manuscript. 

At this stage a great difficulty arises. In first copy of the 
Government Oriental Manuscripts Library, at the end of the first 
adhyftya there is the colophon : grhyamantraYy&khyfiyam prathamo 
'dhyByah. Then there is also a colophon in the form of a karika : 
Ss\alSyanagxhyoktapakayajfic8u karenasu 
mantra ye viniyuktSs te vy&khyltis' cakiapaQina 

Here the author of the commentary for the first adhyaya is not 
Haradatta but Cakrapagin. This colophon is very closely related 
to the first stanza of the commentary. 

1 would have rejected the later colophons and ascribed the 
entire commentary to Cakrapaqi on the evidence of the colophon 
in the form of b5rika found at the end of the first adhyaya. Or 
another way cf getting out of the difficulty would be to say that 
Haradatta and Cakrapaqin are identical. But this latter position 
is impossible. Haradatta’s hand in the commentary is indisputa- 
ble. He says what he has stated in his grftyavyakhyi and the 
statement is found in Haradatta's g(hyavyakya. 

There is a manuscript of A^valSyanagrhyamantntbhojya in 
the Oriental Library in Mysore. This manuscript helped me to 
solve the riddle. In this manuscript the beginning is: 




MANUSCRIPTS NOTCS 



21 



prunipatya mnHiklcvnm liarndittiiia dhimaia 
B^valAyang(li)'aHlhnniniiliavyakhy& vidhlyatc 

Now (ho fort must he that (here me two distinct works called 
(lie irfvalflyanaKthyainnnlravyakhyfi, one by Haradatta and the 
other by Cakrapiinin. In the manuscripts found in the two 
Libraries in Madras, the two commentaries have got mixed up. 
Tlicrc is Ilia first portion of the commentary of Cakmpamn and 
the latter jtortion uf the commentary of Haradatta written oontinu- 
ou9ly in the same manuscript. 

In tire Madras manuscripts, the commentary proper begins thus, 
after the two stanzas already quoted : tntra pratiiamam mantrnvini- 
yogo vaktnvyab. tala finjnknthanam, tafcuf chandonirdes'ab. tato 
devatnbhidhSnam. viniyoBiulicotustayajHjLae ilona|i smaryate. ffruyatc 
ca tatra smpib- 

innntrnijtUn brClimaqurseyacliandcdoivatavin na yah 
yajnnadliyupanad eti chandasfim yatay&matSm 
sthfiiium varcliati gano vO pStyato m'.yate pra vS 
paptyan bhavatlty artha ovam brahmaqam aha tam 

iti. atha s’rutib — yo ha vO avidiiftrBeyachandodaivatabrfthmaijflna 
mantroga ykjayati vadhyfipayali vS sthflijum varchati gartam va 
padyati pra vfl mlyate psplyan bhavati yfltayftraftny asya chandflipsi 
bliavanti iti. atha yo mantra mantra vada 3a sarvam fiyur eti 
s’rey&n bbavati ayfitayiminy asya chandftqsi bbavanti. tasmad 
devatEdi rtjantro maatre vidy5t iti. ato mantre mantre viniyogadi- 
catu»;ayam boddhavyam. tatra rsidaivatajCSoo c4rthftvagatir upa- 
yujyate. atarf ca msntravivanujam arthavat. tatra prathaman t ft vat 
pakayajfiapras'aipsftrtham ud6hp&/ catasra jeo vy&bhylyame. 

The commentary by Haradatta found in the Mysore Library 
begins thus, after the introductory verse already quoted: tatra 
pakayajHapraPainsfirthEs catasrah. Then the commentary on the 
first verse begins. It is as follows : yab Bamidhft ya fthutl yo vrdona 
dad&s'a marto agaaye yo namasi svadhraralj. jab sair.idhi yo 
martab aaraidhfi agnaye. vibhaktivyatynyah. agnim. dadWa. dus'atib 




22 



THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



dansknrmonyatra. iha tu prlnano dra$|nvyab. agnitn pri?ayali. 
ya ahull. tplyaikavacanasya purvasavanjab. yaj/ cShutyS agmm 
priijayati. yo vcdena yas* co vedeoa mantrabrahmaijalak^aijeiia agmm 
pclnayaii. yo namosh yas' canamaskSrcna agnimpriijall. yocchabda- 
Sanea UcchaWo ‘dhyflharyab (hartavyab). sa svadhvarab sa otvo 
’pi svadhvarali s'obhanayajnob. 

The commentary on this very verse by Cakrapinln in I lie Madras 
manuscripts is as follows: talra yab snmxIhS ya Ehutl iti dve. 
anayob saubhatib kuijva rsih. prathama tk kakup. dvitiyS satobrhatl. 
dve apy Sgneyyau. yo marlo manusyab agnaye s&midhi. dvitiyartbe 
t(tlyai$&. samidham. dadss'a. danakarmayam. dadSli. adhvaro 
yajPab. svadhvarab s'obhano 'dbvarab socnaySga ucyate. samidham 
evftpi s'raddadhSno ’gafiv fidadhykd yo manyeta svadhvaro ’bam 
somena yaja iti aitliab- yacchrutes lacchalxlo ’dhyjhartavyab. talra 
gfhyakfira aha— namas tarasS iti. naraus tasmai tad eva bhavati. 
tasyaivn pavyatab samidadhflnad eva yajEo bhavati ity arthab- rata 
ahull yo vedeoa iti cobhayatra dvitiyartbe trtiyfi. anySm apy ahutim 
agr.au juhvad yo manyeta svadhvaro ‘ham iti s'eaah. purvavad eva 
drajjjavyam. vedas'abdas' ca svSdhyaye drasjavy&b- svadhyayam api 
yo ’gnaye dad&s’a. svadhyayam kurvan ya manyeta svadhvaro ’ham 
iti. svfidhyiyabh&ve ‘pi yo namo dacis'a agnaye namaskaram api 
kurvan yo manyeta svadhvaro ’ham iti tasya yajBo bhavatity arthab- 
yato yajuo val naraab iti Hi br&hmaijam bhavati. 

In the manuscript belonging to the Government Oriental 
Manuscripts Library there is one passage extra in the beginning 
in the Introductory statements After arth&vagatii upayujjyate 
there is the following : katham. yaaya vakyam sa jsib- ya tenocyate 
sa devatl iti smpeb- katham arthavatvam iti cct 



arthavatvam him mantianim mlmaipsaySm prasad hi tarn 
a vas^as tu vSkytrtha iti jaimininS svayam 
sa sarapratySyito devas tena mantretja tadvida 
svarirthavidusab kBmad yatha d(sum pradasyati 
ityAdina s'aunabadibhir avas'yam avaboddhavyo mantrSrtlia iti 
sphujam udghoqyate. 




manuscripts notes 23 

On the rcliuion of the commentary of Harodntta to that of 
CaknpSqia I will write somathini* on n future occasion. I have 
to coniine myself lwrc to n description of tho manuscript in the 
Adyar Librnry and points nhsitijj out oi it I can only touch upon 
and not discuss in dotoil in these notes. 

On P. 8 there is the following statement : atha vai-fvadeva- 
horaamantra Ixil i hanuyipi t rynj iviniamriW ca. tatra suryfiya s'vShfi 
ityfidayo y»ju?&h. es&n pair vumadova|). kalpatvfit. tatha ca 
s'aujukah ; 

anulrrs|as tu yah leas'd t kalpc ’tha brahmaiye 'pi vS 
mantrah podyo 'tha gadyo vn vamadevyam mbodhata 
iti. yajusSm chomlojfl&nam nesyate. accltandastvSd eva. katham 
acc b afadastvarn. s'rutau dars'aaut. jSmi syfia yad yajtuAjyam 
yaju$upn utpunlySt chandnsSpa ulpunStl ajfimitvSyn iti. tasmfit 
sarvesu yajussu chandojiianom Rnafignm. ayr.m nyaynb sBrvatrika 
evam ova. yatra yatra man t rah sa pajhyatc lealpe brfihmaije va 
tatra sarvntra vBiuadovUrgara boddhavyam. 

On P. 12 there is this passage : purohitab purohitasthanlyab- 
yathfi s l BnUknpaus(iknkarmfibhib rajSnam Spadbhyas tr&yato tatha 
yajamiui5oSin havirvahanfidivySpareM. tratB ity arthab. athavh 
purohitas'abdab kriyBvacanah. purvasyfim dis'i fihavaclyatmana 
nihltab athfipita iti purohitab. This may be compared with the 
explanation of the word by SkandasvSmin in R. V. 1. 1. 1 (see 
my edition iu the Madras University Sanskrit Series, No. 8). The 
similarity is quite striking. There arc many other passages which 
bear close resemblance to the commentary’ of SkandasvSmin. 

On P. 154 and 155 there is a reference to a difference of 
opinion between bhedapaksa and nairulctapaksa (P. 154) and 
bo tween nairuktapak^a and aitibfailaptkp (P. 155). This latter 
occurs also on PP. 157 and 158. 

On Page 174 there is a reference to Udgltha. In commenting 
on R. V. 8. 58. I and 2 in connection with the sixth sStra in the 
23rd Kharjdika of the first chapter in the As'valayanagrhyasCtra, 
the commentator says : anena krameiyakhilamantradvayam pajhitva 




24 



THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



vyikhyatam udglthScfcryaib safphitavvikhy&nam kurvadbhib. This 
shows that according to this commentator, Udgitha has commented 
on the eighth raaitfala also. We have manuscripts only for portions 
of the tenth maqdala. This statement is interesting in view of the 
statement of MSdhava son of Vedkajlrya regarding the collaboration 
of Xfir&yai^a and Udgitha with Skandasvimin in writing a single 
Rgvedabh&sya. This statement even suggests that Udgitha was 
an independent commentator on the whole of the saqthitfi. The 
commentary for this portion is by Cakrapi^in and not by Haiadalta. 

The commentary bears a close resemblance to the commentary 
on the pgveda by Skttdasvimin, the commentary on the (feveda 
by Udgitha, the commentary on the Nirukta by Mab»Vara # the 
commentary on some vedsc mantras colled the V&rarncanjrukta- 
samoccaya (already described) and the commentary on the Sfcna- 
veda by MAdhava. The similarity consists of common words, 
common method, common ideas. The commentator does not 
quote any later works. 

The stanzas : 

man trig I m brfihmag&r^eyacbandodaivatavin na yab 
etc. are found in the work of Midhava son of VedkaJfLrya published 
already by me as Madras University S a n s kri t Series No. 2 
(v. i. 4 and 5). MOdhava quotes a large u umber of verses from 
ancient works without hinting that he is quoting from another 
work. The two stanzas in Madhava (II. i. 3 and 4) are found 
quoted by Durga also. But Mfldhava ekes not give any hint 
that he is quoting from another work. So from the occurrence 
of a stanza found in this commentary in the work of Midhava 
son of Verikajiryn, it cannot be argued that be has taken the stanza 
from Midha va. Both arc queuing from the same source. I bave 
reasons to believe that the common source for this commentator 
and for MSdhava (also for Duifa) is a work called Niruktavfirtika. 

(To be continutd) 




I( If VIEWS 



25 



KB VIBWS 

Puva/itsttili/iilii with tho commentary of Sayarjilciiryn published 
by the Tiluk M ah fir Rah Ira University Voidiba Samshodhana Mai) dal 
(Vedic Research Institute). 

The first volume of tho above publication contsunina the first 
M&Qdaln was issuwl more than four years ago. The second volume 
containing the four Mai^ulns. two to five, came about over a year 
ago. The remaining volumes containing the remaining Mapdalas 
are expected in due course. The two volumes already published 
prcsMit a very go<xl appearance worthy of the subject matter con- 
tained in the volumes. Koch volume costs Us. 1 2, not at all an 
exorbitant price. The first volume has 1115 pages and tho second 
has 99S pages. This is the tnnin text matter. Apart from this 
there is soino extra matter also. In the first volume there is n 
Foreword, an Introduction in English, an Introduction in Sanskrit 
and some comments on the various readings, all covering 18 
pages. There is also a list of abbreviations and a list of corroc- 
txens. The snme plan is followed in the second vclutno. 

The commentary of Sflyana is the latest in the history of 
Vedic Exegesis in India. He mentions a large number of earlier 
commentators. He quotes from them sometimes and he has made 
considerable use of them. SSyaija has commented on all the four 
SaipbitSs and on some Btflhmaqaa. His commentary is so very 
lucid and so very elaborate that he superceded all the earlier com- 
mentetots. At the time when Europeans began the study of Sans- 
krit, the earlier commentators of the Vedas had been completely 
eclipsed, and until very recent times do manuscript of any other 
commentary was available. It was the common belief that after 
Yfctka wrote his Nirukta, there was a complete gap in the history of 
Vedic Exegesis in India and SByasja came into the empty field 
two thousand years after Yaska. 

Since Sfiyaqa's commentary was the only one available for 
the Vedas, It was welcomed by scholars with great enthusiasm. 
Max Muller began the edition of the Pgveda with the commentary 
1 




26 



THE ADYAH LIBRARY BULLETIN 



cf Sayaija and the first volume was published in England in 1849. 
The sixth and last volume was published in 1874. There was 
another edition of the same commentary from Bombay in eight 
\olume9. Max Muller’s edition was re-issued in four volumes at 
a later lime. The commentaries on the Taittirlya saiphitS, on die 
Simaveda and on the Atharvaveda were published in India during 
the last many years. His commentaries on the Br&hmapas arc 
also now available in print. 

The first and second editions of the Pgveda with SSyaja’s 
commentary by Max Muller and the edition from Bombay ate now 
out of print ; and if any copies are available in the market, the 
price is very high and few people can afford to purchase them. 
Thus there is a real need for an edition of the work and wc welcome 
this enterprise of the Vaidikashamshodhana Mandala. At this rate 
I take it tlsat the entire work will be published In four volumes 
and will be available to the public at the very moderate price of 
less than Rs. 50. 

Max Muller himself has utilised a large number of manuscripts. 
With all the material available, he was no: able to present an 
edition absolutely satisfactory. In preparing the present edition 
the editors have access to many more manuscripts collected from 
a much wider field. In spile of this, the managing editor has to 
confess in the Introduction to the first volume thus : " Had we 
succeeded in obtaining Devanagari and non- Devanagari MSS. 
complete ami older than those in oar possession, perhaps we would 
have been able to present to the public a more authentic edition." 
The oldest MS. they have used is 450 years old. Well, Sayapa's 
own time is not very much older than that. A real authentic 
odition would be what could be based co the Manuscript prepared 
by Silyapa himself. Unfortunately we have no information about 
the manuscript left by him. Considering the fact that the interval 
between the time of Sfiyaqa and our own time is not so very vast, 
it is not impossible to expect to get at a copy prepared by himself. 
Unfortunately, in the case of no important author in India have 




KliVI KWS 



27 



we been able to secure the author's copy of the work till now. 
It is hoped tluit through the labours of enthusiastic manuscript 
hunters we may he able to secure copies of tlie authors themselves 
in the case of at least the important authors. 

The editors havo made good use of tlie manuscripts they have 
collected. They have given in the text that reading which they 
ccosider the best and the other readings they Ivave given in 
footnotes. In selecting r callings, the editors have used their own 
discretion and a reviewer has no business to complain of this fact 
The managing editor himself says in tlie Introduction to tho first 
volume : “ Though there are good readings in the Grantha and 
Malayalam MSS., we have adopted only such as find support in 
the Devan ngsri." On going through tho edition, I find a large 
number of places whore I foe! that the readings found in the 
South Indian MSS. cotdd have been accepted as the better ones 
for the body of the edition instead of relegating them to the 
foot-notes. But this is a matter ol personal inclinations ; and so 
far as the special needs of scholars are concerned, the readings 
are given in the edition in the form of fcot-notes aDd this must 
satisfy such needs. Still one would have expected some explanation 
for this partiality for the DcvanSgri MSS. 

In many places, the editors have improved upon the edition 
of Max Mallet. The oditors have themselves discussed some of 
the points in considering the variant readings in the opening 
portion of the volumes. But there are place* where aarne im- 
provement* are still possible. I cannot enter into details. I 
could have gone through the entire discussion on the variant 
readings by the editor* and pointed out places where some n>- 
considcraticn would bs reasonable. But in reviewing such a 
stupendous work, one should look at the work os a whole and 
arrive at a judgment It wouhl be both out of propriety and 
out of taste to emphasise details too much. But I point out ace 
important case which will show that in editing such a work, there 
is scope for further study and for investigations beyond the MSS. 




28 



THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



o! the work. Sayai?s gives various interpretations for various 
words, various lines and various verses in different ways in different 
places. He gives the following explanations for the word alctu : 

fl) anjff vyaktigatimrakpu^u ity asm&t 

vydiyartibhyah ktur iti kluh. (R.V. III. 7.6) 

(2) anjll vyaktigatimrak^anepi. ajyata ebhir 
iti bfthulakatvflt ktuh (R.V. III. 17.1) 

In the first explanation, there is a sGtra which is not traeable 
to any grammar. There are three roots; from the second and 
third, the words formed must be aktu aad jtn. Theta is something 
wrong with the first The root must be pa and the word formed 
must b« p'tu. In the UgSdi of the BhojavyEkarana there is the 
sUira paHjartibhyo <Jit. (2.1.63.) The termination is to be taken 
over from the previous sGtra 61. Slyaqa or the scribes have wrongly 
quoted the surra. As for the second explanation, there is only artes 
tun (1.67) in UqSdi. These facts need scrutiny. There are other 
similar cases in the work. The editors have given no references 
in these cases. The UqSdi references here are to the Madras 
University Sanskrit Series edition No. 7, Pts. 2 and 6. 

The quotations found in Sayaija must be subjected to very 
thorough and close scrutiny. He was quoting from memory and 
very often it may be only the sense that he remembered and not 
the exact words. This may appear a very stupendous task ; but 
it has to be done. 

The fact that nearly all the commentaries on the vedic texts 
that preceded Sayaqa and that formed the basis for Saya^a's com- 
mentary have come to light, sometimes completely and sometimes 
only in fragments, does not in any way detract from the importance 
of the work of Sfiyaija. On the other hand SEyarjas work becomes 
more important on this account. It was held by many scholars 
in Europe that SSyaija had no tradition, and that his interpretations 
of Vedic words and passages are the result more of erudition and 
imagination than of any first hand knowledge of vedic texts derived 
from tradition. Now we know that there was a living tradition 




REVIEWS 



29 



and that Sfiysuja wrote his commentaries because of the rich herit- 
age of vedic interpretations handed down to him through an un- 
broken tradition. This is in itself a very important factor. 

The commentary of Skmidusvamin on Rgvedn, which was 
known to SByana and which Snyatja quotes is available in frog- 
meats. I have edited the commentary for the first adbyuya in the 
Madras University Sanskrit Sorias as No. 8. In the Bulletin of the 
Adyar Library I have given a full description of the manuscript for 
the later portion in the fourth part of the first volume. The com- 
mentary of Udgltha (also known to Sayatja and quoted by Stlyana) 
is available for a small portion of the tenth Maijdala. B halt a- 
bhSskara's commentary on the Taittirlya text* has boon published 
in the Mysore Series. The commentary on the Sfim&veda by 
BharatasvSmin is being now published for she first time in this 
Bulletin. Manuscripts are available in many Libraries. Another 
commentary on the Samnveda by Mddhava (there is no evidence of 
SSyar^ having known it) is also being published in this Bulletin. 
A commentary on the Bgvodn by M&dhavo has been published for 
the wholo of the first adhy&ya of the first a^aka and porticos of 
the second adhySya in this Bulletin. There is another IdSdhava, 
the son of Vefikajarya, who is also a commentator on the Pgveda. 
His commentary is also published in this Bulletin for the sake of 
comparison. Now Sayaiya quotes a Madhavn in his commentary 
or. Bgveda 10. 66. 1. It is not certain which of the two Mfidliavas 
(whose Bgveda commentaries are being published in this Bulletin) 
is the one mentioned by Sayarja. 

SRyatja superseded the earlier commentators and in an age 
when critical study in India had fallen into a decadent stage, the 
earlier commentaries became eclipsed and complete manuscripts of 
many of them are not now available. Now when these manuscripts 
are being discovered, sometimes only in fragments, in this ago of 
critical study, the earlier commentaries will not supersede the later 
commentary of Sfiyaqa and eclipse his works ; they will only give 
added importance to the work of S&yaija. 




30 



THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



The Adyar Library lias placed ita resources at the di9po6al of 
the editors o( this new publication. We who are in charge of the 
Library aod who conduct this Bulletin are happy that an edition 
of SSyaga worthy of the great work has come out in part and will 
be completed soon. We welcome the edition wholeheartedly. At a 
later Mage when the entire work will be published, we may take the 
opportunity to enter into mare minute details. At this stage we 
simply express our gcod wishes for the successful completion of the 
great and noble work undertaken by the Vaidic Samshodhan 
Magda). 

C. Kunhan Raja 



New Catalogue Catalogorum edited by a Committee with 
Professor MM. S. Kuppuswami Sastri, M.A., I.E.S. (Retd.) as Chief 
Editor, Professor. P. P. Subramanya Sastri, M.A., B.A. (Oxon.), 
and C. Kunban Raja, B.A. (Hons), D. Phil., Editors, Qto, 
Published by the Madras University, 1937, Provisional Fasciculus, 
Pt>- xx, 35. 

The Madras University in undertaking to revise and bring 
uptodate the Catalogus Calalogorum of Dr. Aufrecht has a 
stupendous task before it. The revision of that monumental work 
has become a matter of necessity as since its publication several 
new collections have been made and catalogued throughout tho 
whole of India. The ceaseless work of research carried on by 
Oriental scholars throughout the world has brought the names of 
several authors and works not found in the older work. Much 
water has flown under the bridge since 19C3 when Dr. Aufrecht 
finishod his monumental work. The aim of the present revision is 
to carry out task the of incorporating all the essentials of tbe work 
done till now, b the new book under preparation. 

Some of the new features of the work under review are: (1) the 
inclusion of Pali and PrSkrt and of Jain and Buddhist Literatures 
previously excluded by Aufrecht, taking care to avoid unnesessary 




REVIEWS 



31 



duplication cf work. (2) Heine mainly a work of reference, and as 
an index to the catalogues themselves, only such matter as is 
considered to be either an advance on the older work or an 
original contribution which is informative, is added. (3) All 
references under a particular title arc arranged alphabetically. 

(4) The Editor has drawn particular attentiou to certain 
articles eg. AmsTumat, Agastya etc., as indicating the extent of the 
advance made over the older work. These articles show the care 
with which the work is being conducted by the Assistants Dr. 
V. Raghavan and Mr. E. P. Radhakrtshnnn. 

About a hundred and forty-five lists have been incorporated 
and more lists are promised in the parts to follow. As a work of 
reference the work under review will surely take the first place 
as deservingly as its prcdleessor thirty-five years before. It is 
necessary to point out in this connection that we ought never to 
feel satisfied that cur lists are completo as there is always the 
possibility of fresh finds coming to light and the reluctance of our 
Pandits to give out for the mere asking either a list of manuscripts 
that they have or all the information tbat they could furnish on 
aoy topic. 

While congratulating the Editors on :hc measure of success 
they have achieved in this Provisional Fasciculus we feel it 
necessary to draw attention to the fact that a Catalogus Catala- 
gorum is not a work which conies every day. As a monumental 
work of reference trusted and followed by the scholars aa a constant 
and worthy friend, every reference must be accurate and the errors of 
printing must be none. In this instance, the list of Errata furnished 
with the book gives on the average one mistake per page. The 
interchange of numbers in the citation of pages or the number of 
the manuscripts is pregnant with serious difficulties to the 
scholar, (eg., page 46 last line for 1458 read 15B+>- Some of the 
names have been put in the wrong places page 246 Agni- 
kotrasom aprayega, Agni he Irabrtihmana are to be taken over to 
266). These arc cited only as examples. A work of this type which 




32 THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 

is expected to set the standard for other scholars and Insitutions 
should not abound in errors of this type. The book betrays a 
certain amount of avoidable hurry in the work of pushing the 
book through tbc press. 

A. N. Krishna* 



Annual Report of I he Mysore Archaeological Department 
for the year I9J5, University of Mysore, Qto., pp. viii, 215, with 
28 plates, Bangalore Government Press, 1936. Price Rs. 8. 

Like its predecessors, tbe present volume also is divided into 
five parts. Administrative, Study of Ancient Monoments, Numis- 
matics, Manuscripts and New Inscriptions for tbe Year 1934-35. 
There are also the two Appendices ‘ A ’ and ‘ B ’ about the Con- 
servation of Monuments and the List of Photographs taken during 
the year. We owe this sumptuous volume to tbe energy of Dr. 
M. H. Krishna who is mainly responsible for settling the form 
and content of these Reports. 

A large number of unpublished inscriptions were collected 
during the year and fifty of them are published in the present 
volume. There arc still a few incriptions which are new but 
they are only rare finds. The work of preservation is done on sound 
lines and the conservation notes of the Director (e.g. pp. 10, 13, 
18, 19, etc.) deserve to be carefully read and acted upon. Plate 
II contains some of tho most enchanting sculptures beautifully 
conceived and executed in tho temple of Kalles'vara. The figures 
are rightly held to be tbe finest among those in the Mysore State 
(p. 11). Kaivjra is a village of great antiquity and is found 
mentioned as the centre of a vigaya or district known as Kaivdra- 
vipiva from the days of the GoAgas down to tbe Vijayanagara 
days." (p. 33). The earliest date now available about that village 
is 12S0 A.D. The Aprameya Temple of Dodda-Mallur seems 
to chum antiquity with the Colas. The main shrine is a Co|a 
structure altered in Vijayanagara times by repairs. The references 




REVIEWS 



33 



go back to Rajendra Coja (perhaps earlier than Sri Ramnuja) as 
gathered from the several inscriptions in Tamil. Rebuilt during the 
time of AcyutarAya, the original shrine shows many survivals 
of older origin. Probably the original temple was a Cola construc- 
tion (p. 19). The VenUalnnxmansvaxni Temple at Bangalore 
requires some very necessary and argent repairs in the garbhagpha 
of tbo Devi Temple, and the Director’s suggestions are worth 
immediate action, (p. 24). The monolithic trident, damarugn, fan 
and umbrella (p. 26) arc of gicat interest and of extra-ordinary height. 

The Numismatic part has to be read with care. Dr. Krishna 
draws attention to the resemblance of certain symbols (the bull- 
type) in the coins of the Mysore Museum to the Punch- marked 
Purtttuzs and the pictographs of tbo Indus seals. He also suggests 
that the marks have greater resemblance to the Indus Pictographs 
and arc perhaps representations os legends which cannot now bo 
read. He concludes that the identification of the place of collection 
of these coins and the excavation of the sito might lead to the 
discovery of an important pre-historic or early historic site 
(pp. 67-8). 

The fourth part deals with a manuscript called MzdhavlMkana 
Kfoya from Rampttr, Molakamtlru Taluq. It is a poem in Kanaka 
by Sarikara Kavi— of the 18th century. The date as given by 
tho manuscript is 8th June, 1757 A.D. The poet praises the 
AndhradeS'a and the town of Bcjavadi, and M&dbavadka is named 
aa the king of Bcjavadipatna. 

The text of the several inscriptions have been edited with 
great care, but the binder has transposed the order of the pages 
between pp. 76 and 80. The note* and translation are very useful 
appendages. In pages 116 — 7 are recorded acme references to 
Mummadi Smgayya N&yaka who has often been confused with 
the Velogoti chief, S'inga bhtfpila. They require'careful examination. 

The Report under review exhibits ail the fervour and the 
enthusiam of the author, who, as the President of the Archaeological 
section of the recent (IXth) All-India Oriental Conference, outlined a 




34 THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 

practical scheme of work for furthering the study of Archaeology 
among tho students. The few errors in printing («.*. pages 62 
machanism for mechanism) will be forgotten in the excellence of the 
work that Dr. Krishna has placed before u* and thereby earned the 
gratitude of the scholars. 

A. N. Krishna* 



The Journal oj she Music Academy, Vol V. A quarterly 
journal devoted to the advancement of the Science and Art of 
Music, Dr. V. Raghavan, M.A., Ph.D., Managing Editor, with 
Mr. T. V. Subba Rao, B.A., B.L., Editce-in -charge. Published 
by the Music Academy, 8 Philips Street, George Town, Madras. 
Annual subscription : inland Rs. ♦ ; foreign 8 sh. 

The resumption of the publication of this journal devoted to 
the promotion of research in the field of Music must be welcomed 
by all lovers of Indian culture. The journal fulfils a real need as 
it is the only journal of its kind in India. Those responsible for 
the resuscitation of the journal dc9crvo great commendation as they 
have had to work under difficult circumstances. 

The journal itself proposes no change of policy and the 
publication of classical works and original articles in the field 
from the hand of experts promises a series of delectable papers 
opening a new era and vision in that paiticluar field. 

The SOmagOna by Mr. M. S- Ramaswami Aiyar is followed by 
tlie text of the SangltasudhU. The Abkinayasdrasampula in Tamil 
in the form of a glossary will clear many mysteries of the methods 
of abhiuaya to the reader. Dr. Raghavan contributes an im- 
portant article on the Music Manuscripts in Sanskrit in the 
Bhardarkar Institute, Poona. The proceedings of the Madias Music 
Conference of 1933 dose up the last portions of the journal. 

We congratulate Dr. Raghavan and his co-worker on the 
laudable work, and in conveying our good wishes, hope that the 
journal will have a long life of usefulness and prosperity. 

A N. Krishna* 




OUR EXCHANGES 



The Adhyatma Prakas/a. 

The Andhra SShitya Pari tot PatrikU. 

The Archiw Orientals. 

The Aryan Path. 

Taa Annals of Oriental Research, Madras University. 

The BhSrata Dharma. 

The Bharatn Mitra. 

The Buddha Prabha, Bombay. 

The Bulletin ot the Museum of Fine Arts, Breton. 

The Bullebn L'Ecole Prancaise D'Extrdme Orient, Hanoi. 
The Bulletin of the New York Public Library. 

The Cochin Government Archeologist, Trichur. 

The Director of Archeology, Nizam's Dominions, Hyderabad. 
The Eastcra Buddhist. 

The Falerated India. 

The Hindu, Madras (Sunday Edition). 

The Indian Culture, Calcutta. 

The Indian Historical Quarterly, Calcutta. 

The Indian Review, Madias. 

The Indian Social Reformer, Bombay. 

The Inner Culture. 

The Jaina Antiquary. 

The Jaioa Gazotto. 

The Journal of the American Oriental Society, New Haven, 
Conn. 

The Journal of the Aanaraalai University. 

The Journal of the Benares Hindu University. 

The Journal of the Bihar and Orissa Research Society. 

The Journal of the University of Bombay. 

The Journal of the Greater India Society. 

The Journal of Indian History, Mylapore, Madras. 




36 THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 

The Journal of tho K. R. Kama Oriental Institute. 

The Journal of the Madras Geographical Association. 
The Journal of Oriental Research. Mylapore. 

The Kalaimagal. 

The Karnataka Historical Review. 

The Karnitaka SUhitya Parisat PatiikjL 

The Maharaja’s Sanskrit College Magazine, Mysore. 

The MlraflmsS Prakas'a, Poona. 

The Missouri University Studies. 

The Mysore Archeological Series. 

The NBgarl Prac&rinl PatrikS, Benares City. 

The New Review, Calcutta. 

The New Times and Ethiopia News. 

The Oriental Literary Digest, Poona. 

The Philosophical Quarterly, Amalner. 

The Poona Orientalist. 

The Prabudilha Karnafaka. 

The Progress To-day, Loodon. 

The Quarterly Journal of the Mythic Society, Bangalore. 
The Religions, London. 

Tho Rama Vanna F Bearch Institute, Trichur. 

The Saipskrita Rati, sara, Jaipur. 

The Saipskrita SShitya Parisat Patrika, Calcutta. 

The Seatamil, Madura. 

The Shri, Kashmir. 

The Sudd ha Dharma, Mylapore. 

The Theosopbical World, Adyar. 

The Thooscphist, Adyar. 

The Udyuna Patrika, Tiruvadi, Tanjore District. 

The Vishvabharati Quarterly, Shantinikctan. 

The World-peace, Calcutta. 

The Z. D. M. G. 



Printed and published by C Subbarayudo, at tbc Vaaaota Pro*, Ail jar. Madras 




K0SM1C MIND 



By H. P. Blavatsky 

[In iha Thooaophical calendar, Iho 8 111 of May— known os 
Whit* Lotus Day— is saciod to the memory of H. P. Blavateky, 
that versatile genius of encyclopaedic knowledge and profound 
wisdom, who gave Theosophy or Brahmavldya to the modem 
world, battling bravely and ouoooaalully against blatant 
materialism rampant in her day. It is in grateful recognition of 
her unforgettable services to the cause of Brahmavldya and 
oriental learning that one number of the BRAHMAVIDYA la 
designated "The Blavatsky Number," and issued on the 8th 
May of every year. The following article by her, oxtractod. by 
kind permission, from " Lucifer", Vol VI, of IS April 1890, may 
serve as a sample of her heroic literary fights against the mighty 
materialists of hot day. — G. S. Ml 

Edison’S conception of matter was quoted in our March 
editorial article. The great American electrician is reported 
by Mr. G. Parsons Lathrop in Harper's Magazine as giving 
out his personal belief about the atoms being “ possessed by a 
certain amount of intelligence," and shown indulging in other 
reveries of this kind. For this flight of fancy the February 
Review of Reviews takes the inventor of the phonograph to task 
and critically remarks that “ Edison is much given to dream* 
ing," his " scientific imagination " being constantly at work. 

Would to goodness the men of science exercised their 
" scientific imagination " a little more and their dogmatic and 
cold negations a little less. Dreams differ. In that strange 
state of being which, as Byron has it, puts us in a position 
" with seal’d eyes to see," one often perceives more real facts 
than when awake. Imagination is, again, one of the strongest 




38 THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 

elements in human nature, or in the words of Dugald Stewart 
it " is the great spring of human activity, and the principal 
source of human improvement . . . Destroy the faculty, 
and the condition of men will become as stationary ns that of 
brutes." It is the best guide of our blind senses, without 
which the latter could never lead us beyond matter and its 
illusions. The greatest discoveries of modern science are due 
to the imaginative faculty of the discoverers. But when has 
anything now been postulated, when a theory clashing with 
and contradicting a comfortably settled predecessor put forth, 
without orthodox science fir3t sitting on it, and trying to crush 
it out of existence ? Harvey was also regarded at first as a 
“ dreamer " and a madman to boot. Finally, the whole of 
medern science is formed of 11 working hypotheses," the fruits 
of “ scientific imagination " as Mr. Tyndall felicitously 
called it. 

Is it then, because consciousness in every universal atom 
and the possibility of a complete control over the cells and 
atoms of his body by man, have not been honoured so far with 
the imprimatur of the Popes of exact science, that the idea is 
to be dismissed as a dream ? Occultism gives the same teach- 
ing. Occultism tells us that every atom, like the monad of 
Leibnitz, is a little universe in itself ; and that every organ 
and cell in the human body is endowed with a brain of its 
own, with memory, therefore, experience and discriminative 
powers. The idea of Universal Life composed of individual 
atomic lives is one of the oldest teachings of esoteric philos- 
ophy, and the very modem hypothesis of modern science, 
that of crystalline life, is the first ray from the ancient 
luminary of knowledge that has reached our scholars. If 
plants can be shown to have nerves and sensations and instinct 
(but another word for consciousness), why not allow the same 




KOSMIC MINI' 



3 ‘> 



in the cell* of the human body ? Science divide* matter inlo 
organic and inorganic bodies, only because it reject* the idea 
of aUalute life and a life-principle as an entity: otherwise it 
would be the hist lo see that absolute life cannot |>roducc 
even a geomcirical point, or an atom inorganic in its essence. 
Hut Occultism, you see. “ teaches mysteries " llicy say ; and 
mystery is Ike negation of common sense, just as again rncta- 
physics is but a kind of poetry, according to Mr. Tyndall. Tbrre 
is no such thing for science as mystery ; and therefore, as a Life- 
Principle is, and must remain for the intellects of our eivtlircd 
races for ever a mystery on physical Una — they w ho deal in 
this question have to be of necessity either fools or knaves. 

Dixit. Nevertheless, no may repeat with a French 
preacher, “ mystery I he fatality of science," Official 
science is surrounded on every side and hedged in by 
unapproachable, for ever impenetrable mysteries. And why ? 
Simply because physical science is self-doomed to a squirrel- 
like progress around a wheel of matter limited by our five 
sense*. And though it is as confessedly ignorant of the 
formation of matter, as of the generation of a simple cell : 
though it is a* powerless to explain what is this, that, or the 
other, it will yet dogmatise and insist on what life, mnttrr 
and the rest arc not. It comes to this : the word* of Father 
Felix addressed fifty years ago to the F'rcnch academicians 
have nearly become immortal as a Iniisnt. ** Gentlemen," 
he said. “ you throw- into our teeth the reproach that we teach 
mysteries. But imagine whatever *ciencr you will ; follow- thr 
magnificent sweep of it* deduction* . . . and when you arrive 
at its parent source you come lace to lace with the nnknow n ! “ 

Now to lay at rest once for all in the minds of Theos- 
ophists this vexed question, we intend to prove that modern 
science, ow ing to physiology, is itself on the eve of discovering 




40 



THE ADYAK LIBRARY BULLETIN 



that consciousness is universal — thus justifying Edison’s 
" dreams-" But before we do this, wc mean also to show 
that though many a man of science is soaked through and 
through with such belief, very few are brave enough to openly 
admit it, as the late Dr. Pirogoff of St. Petersburg has done 
in his posthumous Memoirs. Indeed that great surgeon and 
pathologist raised by their publication quite a howl of indigna- 
tion among his colleagues. How then ? the public asked : 
He, Dr. Pirogoff, whom we regarded as almost the embodi- 
ment of European learning, believing in the superstitions of 
crazy alchemists ? He, who in the words of a contemporary : 

was the very incarnation ol exact science and methods of 
thought; who had dissected hundreds and thousands of human 
organs making himself a* acquainted with all the mysteries of 
surgery and anatomy as we are with our familiar furniture; the 
savant for whom physiology had no secrets and who, above all men, 
was one to whom Voltaire might have ironically asked whether he 
had not found immortal soul between the bladder and the blind 
gut, — that same Piiogofl is found after his death devoting whole 
cliaptera in his literary Will to the scientific demonstration . . . 
Novo ye Vremya of 1887. 

— Of what ? Why, of the existence in every organism of a 
distinct " vital FORCE " independent of any physical or 
chemical process. Like Liebig he accepted the derided and 
tabooed homogeneity of nature — a Life Principle — that perse- 
cuted and hapless teleology, or the science of the final causes 
of things, which is as philosophical as it is unscientific, if we 
have to believe imperial and royal academies. His unpardon- 
able sin in tho eyes of dogmatic modem science, however, 
was this : The great anatomist and surgeon, had the “ hardi- 
hood " to declare in his Memoirs, that : 

We have no cause to reject the possibility ol the existence 
of organisms endowed with such properties that would make of 
them — the direct embodiment of the universal mind — x perfection 
inaccessible to our own (human) mind . . . Because, wc have no 




KOSMIC MINI) 



41 



right to maintain that man is the Inst expression of the divine 
creative thought. 

Snell arc the chief features of the heresy of one, who 
ranked high among the men of exact science of this age. 
His Memoirs show plainly that not only he believed in Uni- 
versal Deity, divine Ideation, or the Hermetic “ Thought 
divine," and a Vital Principle, but taught all this, and tried 
to demonstrate it scientifically. Thus he argues that Universal 
Mind needs no physico-chemical, or mechanical brain as an 
organ of transmission. He even goes so far as to admit it in 
these suggestive words : 

Our reason must accept in all necessity an infinite and 
eternal Mind which rules and governs the ocean of life . . . Thought 
and creative ideation, in /till agreement with the lares oj unity 
and causation, manifest themselves plainly enough in universal 
life without the participation of brain-slush . . . Directing the 
forces and elements toward the formation of organisms, this organ- 
ising life-principle becomes self sentient, self-conscious, racial 
or individual. Substance, ruled and directed by the life-principle, 
is organized according to a general defined {dan into certain 
types... 

He explains this belief by confessing that never, during his 
long life so full of study, observation, and experiments, could lie 

acquire the conviction, that our brain could be the only organ 
of thought in the whole universe ; that everything in this world, 
rave that organ, should be unconditioned and senseless, and that 
human thought alone should impart to the universe a meaning and 
a reasonable harmony in its integrity. 

And he adds a propos of Moleschott’s materialism : 

Howsoever much fish and peas 1 may eat, never shall 1 
consent to give away my Ego into durance vile of a product casually 
extracted by modern alchemy from the urine. If, in our conceptions 
of the Universe it be our fate to fall into illusions, then my ' illusion ' 
has, at least, the advantage of being very consoling. For, It shows 
to me an intelligent Universe and the activity of Forces working in 
it harmoniously and intelligently ; and lhat my ‘ I ' is not the product 
of chemical and histological elements but an embodiment of a 




42 



THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



common universal Mind. The latter, I sense and represent to my- 
self as acting in free will and consciousness in accordance with the 
same laws which are traced for the guid an ce of my own mind, but 
only exempt from that restraint which trammels our human 
conscious individuality, 

For, as remarks elsewhere this great and philosophic man 
of Science : 

The limitless and the eternal, is not only a postulate o f 
our mind and reason, but also a gigantic fact, in itself. What 
would become of our ethical or moral principle were not the ever- 
lastir* and integral truth to serve it as a foundation I 

The above selections translated verbatim from the 
confessions of one who was during his long life a star of the 
first magnitude in the fields of pathology and surgery, show 
him imbued and soaked through with the philosophy of a 
reasoned and scientific mysticism- In residing the Memoirs nf 
that man of scientific fame we feel proud of finding him 
accepting, almost wholesale, the fundamental doctrines and 
beliefs of Theosophy. 

The progress of physiology itself, as we have just said, is 
a sure warrant that the dawn of that day when a full rec- 
ognition of a universally diffused mind will be an accom- 
plished fact, is not far ofi". It is only a question of time. 

For, notwithstanding the boast of physiology, that the 
aim of iLs researches is only the summing up of every vital 
function in order to bring them into a definite order by 
showing their mutual relations to, and connection with, the 
laws of physics and chemistry, hence, in their final form with 
mechanical laws — we fear there is a good deal of contradiction 
between the confessed object and the speculations of some of 
the best of cur modern physiologists. While few of them 
would dare to return as openly as did Dr. Pirogoff lo the 
•* exploded superstition " of vitalism and the severely exiled 




KOSM1C MIND 



43 



life-principle, the principium vittc of Paracelsus — yet physio- 
logy stands sorely ixrrplcxcd in the face of its ablest represent- 
atives before certain facts. Unfortuuntely for us, this age 
of ours is not conducive to the development of moral courage. 
The time for most to act on the noble idea of " principle* non 
homines," has not yet come. And yet there arc exceptions 
to the general rule, and physiology — whose destiny it is to 
become the hand-maiden of Occult troths— has not let the 
latter remain without their witnesses. There are those who 
arc already stoutly protesting against certain hitherto favourite 
propositions. For instance, some physiologists arc already 
denying that it is the forces and substances of so-called “ in- 
animate " nature, which are acting exclusively in living beings. 
For, as they well argue : 

The fact thru we reject the interference of other forces in 
living things, depends entirely on the limitations of our senses. 
We U3e, indeed, the same organs for our observations of both 
animate tutd inanimate nature; and these organs can receive 
manifestations of only a limited realm of motion. Vibrations 
passed along the fibres of our opdc nerves to the brain reach our 
perceptions through our consciousness as sensations of light and 
colour ; vibrations affecting our consciousness through our auditory 
organs strike us as sounds ; all our feelings, through whichever of 
our senses, are due to nothing but motions. 

Such are the teachings of physical Science, and such 
were in their roughest outlines those of Occultism, rcons and 
milleniums back. The difference, however, and most vital 
distinction between the two teachings, is this : official science 
sees in motion simply a blind, unreasoning force or law; 
Occcultism, tracing motion to its origin, identifies it with the 
Universal Deity, and calls this eternal ceaseless motion — the 
“ Great Breath." 1 

1 Vide The Secret Doctrine. Vet. I. pp, 2 and 5. 




44 



THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



Nevertheless, however limited the conception of Modem 
Science about the said Force, still it is suggestive enough to 
have forced the following remark from n great Scientist, the 
present professor of physiology at the University of Basle,' 
who speaks like an Occultist. 

It would be folly in us to ex pec! to be ever able to discover, 
with the assistance only of our external senses, in animate nature 
that something which we are unable to find in the inanimate. 

And forthwith the lecturer adds that man being endowed 
“ in addition to his physical senses with an inner sense," a 
perception which gives him the possibility of observing the 
states and phenomena of his own consciousness " he has to 
use that in dealing with animate nature " — a profession of faith 
verging suspiciously on the borders of Occultism. He denies, 
moreover, the assumption, that the states and phenomena of 
consciousness represent in substance the same manifestations 
of motion as in the external world, and bases his denial by the 
reminder that not all of such states and manifestations have 
necessarily a spatial extension. According to him that only is 
connected with our conception of space which has reached 
our consciousness through sight, touch, and the muscular 
sense, while all the other senses, all the affect *, tendencies, 
as all the interminable series of representations, have no 
extension in space but only in time. 

The winding up argument of the lecturer is most interest- 
ing to Thcosophisls. Says this physiologist of the modem 
school of Materialism : 

Thus, a deeper and more direct acquaintance with our inner 
nature unveils to us a world entirely unlike the aorld represented 
to us by our external senses, and reveals the most heterogeneous 
faculties, shows objects having nought to do with spatial extension, 
and phenomena absolutely disconnected with those that fall under 
mechanical laws. 

* From a |»p«T rrad by him mum tin. *eo at a public lacture. 




KOS.M1C MIND 



45 



Hitherto the opponents of vitalism and " life-principle," 
as well as the followers of the mechanical theory of lifo, 
based their views on the supposed fact that, as physiology 
was progressing forward, its students succeeded more and 
more in connecting its functions with the laws of blind mailer. 
All those manifestations that used to be attributed to a 
" mystical life-force," they said, may be brought now under 
physical and chemical laws. And they were, and still are 
loudly clamouring for the recognition of the fact that it is only a 
question of time when it will be triumphantly demonstrated that 
the whole vital process, in its grand totality, represents nothing 
more mysterious than a very complicated phenomenon of 
motion, exclusively governed by the forces of inanimate nature. 

But here we have a professor of physiology who asserts 
that the history of physiology proves, unfortunately for them, 
quite the contrary ; and he pronounces these ominous words : 

I maintain that the more our experiments and observations 
are exact and many-sided, the deeper we penetrate into facts, the 
nwrc wc try to fathom and speculate on the phenomena of life, the 
more we acquire the conviction, that even those phenomena that we 
had hoped to be already able to explain by physical and chemical 
laws, are in reality unfathomable. They arc vastly n»re compli- 
cated, in fact ; and as wc stand at present, they will not yield to any 
mechanical explanation. 

The Basle professor is no solitary exception ; there arc 
several physiologists who are of his way of thinking ; indeed 
some of them going so far as to almost accept free will 
and consciouaneis in the simplest monadic protoplasms ! 

One discovery after the other tends in this direction. 
The works of some German physiologists are especially 
interesting with regard to cases of consciousness and positive 
discrimination — one is almost inclined to say thought in the 
Anuebas. Now the Amccbas and the animalcule are, as all 




46 



THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



know, microscopical protoplasms— as the VampyreUa Spirogyra 
for instance, a most simple elementary cell, a protoplasmic 
drop, formless and almost structureless. And yet it shows in 
its behaviour something for which zoologists, if they do not call 
it mind and power of reasoning, will have to find some other 
qualification, and coin a new term. For see what Cienkowsky 1 
says of it. Speaking of this microscopical, bare, reddish cell he 
describes the way in which it hunts for and finds among a num- 
ber of other aquatic plants one called Spirogyra, rejecting every 
other food. Examining its peregrinations under a powerful 
microscope, he found it when moved by hunger, first projecting 
its pseudopodia (false feet) by the help of which it crawls. Then 
it commences moving about until among a great variety of plants 
it comes across a Spirogyra, after which it proceeds toward the 
ccllulated portion of one of the cells of the latter, and placing 
itself on it, it bursts the tissue, sucks the contents of one cell 
and Uien passes on to another, repeating the same process. This 
naturalist never saw it take any other food, and it never touched 
any of the numerous plants placed by Cienkowsky in its way. 
Mentioning other Amctba — the Colpadella Pugnaz— he says 
that he found it showing the same predilection for Chlamy- 
domonas on which it feeds exclusively ; " having made a 
puncture in the body of the Chlamydomonas it sucks its 
chlorophyll and then gees away,” he writes, adding these signifi- 
cant words : “ The way of acting of these monads during their 
search for and reception of food, is so amazing that one is 
almost inclined to see in them consciously acting beings I " 
Among hundreds of accusations against Asiatic nations 
of degrading superstitions, based on "crass ignorance," 
there exists no more serious denunciation than that which 

' L. Cienkowsky. Sec hi* work Btitra£a zur Kenlntss dor Uotiadc*. 
Arehiv. I. mikreokop. Amtomle. 




KOSMIC MIND 



47 



accuses and convicts them of personifying and even deifying 
the chief organs of, and in. the human body. Indeed, do not 
we hear thes: “benighted fools’’ of Hindus speaking of the 
small-pox as a goddess — thus personifying the microbes of 
the variolic virus ? Do we not read about Tantrikas, a sect of 
mystics, giving proper names to nerves, cells and arteries, 
connecting and identifying various perts of the body with 
deities, endowing functions and physiological processes with 
intelligence, and what not ? The vertebra, fibres, ganglia, the 
cord, etc., of the spinal column ; the heart, its four chambers, 
auricle and ventricle, valves and the rest ; stomach, liver, 
lungs and spleen, everything has its special deific name, is 
believed to act consciously and to act under the potent will of 
the Yogi, whose head and heart are the seats of Brahma end 
the various parts of whose body are all the pleasure grounds 
of this or another deity ! 

This is indeed ignorance. Especially when we think that 
the said organs, and the whole body of man are composed 
of cells, and these cells are now being recognized ns individual 
organisms and— ^uien sabe — will come perhaps to be rec- 
ognized some day as an independent race of thinkers inhabit- 
ing the globe, called man I It really looks like it. For was it 
not hitherto believed that all the phenomena of assimilation 
and sucking in of food by the intestinal canal, could be ex- 
plained by the laws of diffusion and endosmosis ? And now, 
alas, physiologists have come to learn that the action of the 
intestinal canal during the act of absorbing, is not identical 
with the action of the non-living membrane in the dialyser. 
It is now well demonstrated on the intestinal epithelium of 
cold-blooded animals that 

this wall is covered with epithelium cells, each of which is a a 
organism per *e, a living being, and with very complex fucctiona . . . 




48 



THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



while globules of fat contained in food penetrated through the walla 
of the intestines into lymphatic channels, the smallest of pigmental 
grains introduced into the intestines did not do so — this remained 
unexplained. But to day we know, that this faculty of selecting their 
special food— of assimilating the useful and rejecting the useless 
and the harmful— is common to all the unicellular organisms-' 

And the lecturer queries, why. if this discrimination in 
the selection of food exists in the simplest and the most 
elementary of the cells, in the formless and structureless 
protoplasmic drops — why it should not exist also in the epi- 
thelium cells of our intestinal canal. Indeed, if the Vampy- 
rella recognizes its much beloved Spirogyra, among hundreds 
of other plants as shown above, why should not the epithelium 
cell, sense, choose and select its favourite drop of fat from a 
pigmental grain ? But we will be told that "sensing, choosing, 
and selecting " pertain only to reasoning beings, at least to 
the instinct of more structural animals than is the protoplas- 
mic cell outside or inside man. Agreed ; but as we translate 
from the lecture of a learned physiologist and the works of 
other learned naturalists, we can only say. that these learned 
gentlemen must know what they are talking about ; though they 
are probably ignorant of the fact that their scientific prose is 
but one degree removed from the ignorant, superstitions, but 
rather poetical "twaddle" of the Hindu Yogis and Tantribas. 

Anyhow, our professor of physiology falls foul of the 
materialistic theories of diffusion and endosmosis. Armed 
with the facts of the evident discrimination and a mind in 
the cells, he demonstrates by numerous instances the fallacy 
of trying to explain certain physiological processes by mechan- 
ical theories; such for instance as the passing of sugar from 
the liver (where it is transformed into glucose) into the blood. 
Physiologists find great difficulty in explaining this process, 

1 From Iho [Wper r«d by the Professor of phyiictogy at (lie University 
at Buie, prenouiiy quwwl. 




KOSMIC MIND 



49 



and regard it as an impossibility to bring it under the 
tndosmc.sk laws. The mysterious faculties of selection, of 
extracting from the blood one kind of substance and rejecting 
another, of transforming the former by means of decomposi- 
tion and synthesis, of directing some of the products into 
passages which will throw them out of the body and redirect- 
ing others into the lymphatic and blood vessels — such is the 
work of the cells. " It is evident that in all this there is not 
the slightest hint at diffusion or endasmose says the Basle 
physiologist. “ It becomes entirely useless to try and explain 
these phenomena by chemical laws." 

But perhaps physiology is luckier in some other depart- 
ment ? Failing in the laws of alimentation, it may have found 
some consolation for its mechanical theories in the question 
of the activity of muscles and nerves, which it sought to 
explain by electric laws ? Alas, electrobiology on the lines of 
pure dynamic electricity has cgregiously failed. Ignorant of 
" Fohat ” no electrical currents suffice to explain to it either 
muscular or nervous activity. 

But there is such a thing as the physiology of external 
sensations. Here we are no longer on terra incognita, and all 
such phenomena have already found purely physical expla- 
nations. No doubt, there is the phenomenon of sight, the 
eye with its optical apparatus, its camera cbscura. But the 
fact of the sameness of the reproduction of things in the eye, 
according to the same laws of refraction as on the plate of a 
photographic machine, is no vital phenomenon. The same 
may be reproduced on a dead eye. The phenomenon of life 
consists in the evolution and development of the eye itself. 
How is this marvellous and complicated work produced ? 
To this physiology replies, " We do not know " ; for, toward 



the solution of this 



great problem : 




50 



THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



Physiology has not yet mads one single step. The same 
may be said of all the organs of sense. The same also relates to 
ocher departments of physiology. We had hoped to explain the 
phenomena of the circulation of the bleed by tbe laws of hydro- 
statics or hydrodynamics. Of course the blocd moves in accord- 
ance with the hydrodynamical laws; but its relation to them 
remains utterly passive. As to the active functions of the heart 
and the muscles of its vessels, no one, 10 far, has ever been able to 
explain them by physical laves. 

The underlined words in the concluding portion of the able 
Professor’s lecture are worthy of an Occultist Indeed, he sccm3 
to be repeating an aphorism from the " Elementary Instruc- 
tions " of the esoteric physiology of practical Occultism : 

The riddle of life is found in the active functions of a 
living organism , ' the real perception of which activity we can get 
only through self-observation, and not owing to our external 
senses ; by observations on our will, so far as it penetrates our con- 
sciousness, thus revealing itself to our inner sense. Therefore, 
when the same phenomenon acts only cn our external senses, we 
recognize it no longer. We see everything that takes place around 
and near the phenomenon of motion, but the essence of that 
phenomenon we do not see at all, because we lock tor it a special 
organ of receptivity. We can accept that esse in a mere hypothet- 
ical way, and do so, in fact, when we speak of ‘ active functions.’ 
Thus does every physiologist, for he cannot go on without such 
hypothesis ; and this is a first experiment cf a psychological ex- 
planation of all vital phenomena . . . And if it is demonstrated to 
ub that wo are unable with the help only of physics and chemistry 
to explain the phenomena of life, what may we expect from other 
adjuncts cf physiology, from the sciences of morphology, anatomy, 
and histology ? 1 maintain that these can never help us to unriddle 
the problem of any of the mysterious phenomena of life. For, 
after we have succeeded with the help of scalpel and microscope in 
dividing the organisms into their most elementary compounds, and 
reached the simplest of cells, it is just here that we find ourselves 
face to face with tbe greatest problem of all. The simplest monad, 

1 Life md activity are but the two diSereat coma for th« ui» idea. ce. 
whol In still more coctki, they are two weeds with which the man of tciecce 
connect no d«6sil« idea whatever. Nevertheless, inc perhaps jun for that, 
they are oKigod to um them, for they contain the point c < coolant Ueween the 
meat difficult problems ©>er which, in fact, the greatest thinker* cf the material- 
istic school have over tripped. 




K0SM1C MIND 



51 



a microscopical point of protoplasm, formless and structureless, exhi- 
bits yet all the essential vital functions, alimentation, growth, breed- 
ing, motion, feeling and sensuous perception, and even such functions 
which replace ‘ consciousness ’ — the soul of the higher animals I 

The problem — for Materialism — is a terrible one, indeed ! 
Shall our cells, and infinitesimal monads in nature, do for us 
that which the arguments of the greatest Pantheistic philos- 
ophers have hitherto failed to do ? Let us hope so. And if 
they do, then the " superstitious and ignorant " Eastern Ycgis, 
and even their exoteric followers, will find themselves vindicat- 
ed. For we hear from the same physiologist that : 

A large number of poisons are prevented by the epithelium 
calls from penetrating into lymphatic spaces, though we know that 
they arc easily decomposed in the abdominal and intestinal juices. 
More than this. Physiology is aware that by injecting these 
poisons directly into the blood, they will separate from, and reappear 
through the intestinal walls, and that in this process the lymphatic 
cells ralce a most active part 

If the reader turns to Webster's Dictionary he will find 
therein a curious explanation at the words “lymphatic" 
and “Lymph." Etymologists think that the Latin word 
lympha is derived from the Greek ttymphe, “b nymph or 
inferior Goddess," they say. "The Muses were sometimes 
called nymphs by the poets. Hence (according to Webster) 
all persons in a state of rapture, as seers, poets, madmen, etc., 
were said to be caught by the nymphs (n >p^oX»prro*)." 

The Goddess of Moisture (the Greek and Latin nymph or 
lymph, then) is fabled in India as being born from the pores 
of one of the Gods, whether the Ocean God, Vanina, or a 
minor " River God " is left to the particular sect and fancy of 
the believers. But the main question is, that the ancient 
Greeks and Latins are thus admittedly known to have shared 
in the same “ superstitions " 09 the Hindus. This superstition 
is shown in their maintaining to this day that every atom of 




52 



THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



matter in the fonr (or five) Elements is an emanation from an 
inferior God or Goddess, himself or herself an earlier emana- 
tion from a superior deity ; and, moreover, that each of these 
atoms — being Brahma, one of whose names is Anu, or atom— no 
sooner is it emanated than it becomes endowed wish conscious- 
ness, each of its kind, and free-will, acting within the limits of 
law. Now, he who knows that the kosmic trimurti (trinity) 
composed of Brahma, the Creator ; Vishnu, the Preserver ; and 
Siva, the Destroyer, is a most magnificent and scientific 
symbol of the material Universe and its gradual evolution ; 
and who finds a proof of this, in the etymology of the names 
of these deities, plus the doctrines of Gupta Vidya, or esoteric 
knowledge — knows also how to correctly understand this 
“ superstition." The five fundamental titles of Vishnu— added 
to that of Anu (atom) common to all the trimurtic personages — 
which are, Bhutatman, one with the created or emanated 
materials of the world ; Pradhanatman, " one with the sen- 
ses " ; Paramatman, " Supreme Soul ” ; and Atman, Kosmic 
Soul, or the Universal Mind — show sufficiently what the 
ancient Hindus meant by endowing with mind and conscious- 
ness every atom and giving it a distinct name of a God or a 
Gcddess. Place their Pantheon, composed of 30 crores (or 
300 millions) of deities within the macrocosm (the Universe), 
or inside the microcosm (man) and the number will not be 
found overrated, since they relate to the atoms, cells, and 
molecules of everything that is. 

This, no doubt, is too poetical and abstruse for our 
generation, but it seems decidedly as scientific, if not more so, 
than the teachings derived from the latest discoveries of 
Physiology and Natural History. 




WHERE THEOSOPHY AND SCIENCE 

MEET 



(A STIMULUS TO MODERN THOUGHT: 

FOREWORD 

It is with great pleasure that I have undertaken, 
on behalf of the Adyar Library, the publication of the 
book entitled WHERE THEOSOPHY AND SCIENCE MEET, 
(A Stimulus to Modern Thought), edited by Professor 
D. D. Kongo. The book is the result of a joint and 
co-operatioe effort of a number of members of The 
Thcosophical Society from different parts of the 
world, who have each written a monograph on some 
branch or branches of science and philosophy of which 
each has made a special study in the light of Theosophy 
with a view to correlate the two. This book will come 
out in four parts at intervals of two or three months, 
Part I appearing in May 1938. Prof. Kanga has 
recently retired from the Indian Educational Serolce and 
come to stay at Adyar. He Is still connected with the 




Bombay University, which is his Alma Maler. as a 
member of the Chemistry Editorial Beard and the 
Managing Editor of ihe Physical Science Number of 
the Bombay University Journal. Bang a keen student 
of both Theosophy and Science he is eminently fitted 
to undertake a work of this nature. As the sub-title 
indicates, II is the hope of the Editor that the book 
Will ad as a stimulus to modern thought and will 
particularly appeal to those who are intellectually dis- 
contented and anxious to find out the Truth for them- 
seloes and apply it to ihe solution of the many compli- 
cated problems facing society. 

G. SRINIVASA MURTL 

Dtmtor. 




INTRODUCTION 



It may appear strange, but is nevertheless true, that a number 
Mod «m ScUnce °* statements regarding Man and Nature 



•« iiij of 
Th(*«ophy. 



made some years ago in the classic literature 
of Theosophy and Ancient Wisdom are now, 
year after year, being corroborated by science. 1 Thus Theosophy 
finds in Modern Science a great ally, for it supports in an 
increasing measure the truths given in theosopbical literature. 
We have deep respect and veneration for the great 
Appreoiattoa of scientists who have given us the new knowl- 
Bcioftoe edge and consequently a new outlook on 

life by giving a new orientation to scientific thought. We 
yield to none in our admiration of the scientific method which 
is so thorough and so exact. We fully appreciate what the 
scientists have so far been able to do by means of the scientific 
method, the value of which all the world acknowledges. 

But if it is true that a large number of recent scientific 
M*th(di of n*- discoveries have been anticipated in so 
M»roh Ganpirtd. many directions by the Ancient Wisdom, 
which Theosophy embodies ; or, as Sir Oliver Lodge has put it, 
that modern science is rediscovering some of the truths of 
ancient science ; or, again, in the words of Professor Soddy, that 
we are treading today the road which the ancients trod in the 
unrecorded history of the world,' then there must be another 

" Scientific Corrohoraltotu of Theosophy ” (ad other monognphi (see 
me). 

• Frederick Scddy, TKt lHltrprOaltc*% of Retftwn. 

3 




54 THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 

method of investigation of which the Ancient Wisdom was 
the resalt, and it would be pertinent to inquire what that 
method is and who the persons arc who use it. The method 
by which the truths given out in the Ancient Wisdom were 
discovered, is known as the Occult Method and those who 
use it are known as occultists, seers and S3gcs, for they pos- 
sessed powers of which present-day science is just beginning 
to be aware. This method is not contradictory but supple- 
mentary to. or merely an extension of, the scientific method, 
and superior to it inasmuch as, first, it is more comprehensive 
than the scientific method, having a wider range of data from 
which to draw inferences, for, in addition to scientific data it 
includes also data obtained by clairvoyant research — and 
clairvoyance is now recognized as a fact in nature ; 1 secondly, 
it collects its data by actually seeing the inner working of the 
phenomena and not only by the observation of their external 
behaviour as is done by science ; and thirdly, it can survey 
a long stretch of time extending over tens of thousands of 
years, clairvoyant observations of which have been made by 
a very large number of seers and sages of the past. 

These observations were classified and inferences drawn 
therefrom ; these inferences were tested and either modified, 
amplified or rejected ; those which stood the test were checked 
and verified over and over and over again in the light of 
further observations. Time has been one of the great assets 
of the occult researchers, and the strictly scientific method of 
investigation which they followed has been another.' A number 
of statements given in recent theosophical literature and 
confirmed by science are the results of independent clairvoyant 
researches of Dr. Annie Besant and C. W. Leadbcatcr.' 

' Monograph* oo " .Wcaaotogy " and " P.ycl.«c Research " (see Scheme). 

■ MoDUKT*p!>» oo " Theosophy mat Modern Science/' and “Whither 
Science." |w* Scheme). 

• Monograph oo " Arctieoioiy " (eee Scheme). 




WHERE THEOSOPHY AND SCIENCE MEET 55 

In view of what has been stated above, tile recent dis- 
PhjUcal Satenc* cussion in Nature which began with the 
u4 PtlloMphy. nr iid e by Dr. Dingle on “ Modern Aristo- 
tclianism," ' the letters by different scientists which appeared 
in reply to this article under the title " Physical Science and 
Philosophy,” and Dr. Dingle’s counter-reply to these letters 
under the heading M Deductive and Inductive Methods in 
Science ”* were opportune and illuminating. It was a dis- 
cussion in which the intellectual giants of the day took part, 
many or them being Fellows of the Royal Society. Dr. Dingle 
favoured the strict inductive method for the discovery of 
truth about Nature- He “ inveighed against a new departure 
in scientific method [followed by Sir Arthur Eddington and 
others] which had grown out of the revolution of thought 
provoked by relativity theory." 

" The question," in his words, was " whether we could 
discover the truth about Nature rationally without recourse to 
experience." He was against the metaphysical line of attack 
on physical problems. The discussion “ raised the matter of 
the curious relationship which at present subsists between 
metaphysics and science." 

Wc arc of the opinion that this new departure in scientific 
method is inevitable as a result of evolution in the conscious- 
ness of man. The gradual evolution of physics into meta- 
physics and of metaphysics into occultism, is hound to take 
place in the case of some few people who arc so constituted 
that they arc more susceptible to discover truth, first, by pure 
reason and later on by intuition- In the light which Theos- 
ophy sheds on the constitution of man And his intellectual 
evolution, from the analytical mind Stage to that of the 
synthetic mind, and then to the stage of the intuitional mind, 

1 Saturn 8 May 1937. p. 784. 

• Saturr., 12 Juno 1937. pp. W to 1.012. 




THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



all the three methods of investigation, namely, the inductive, 
the metaphysical and the occult, take their rightful places, so 
that the present metaphysical phase we arc witnessing is a 
necessary stage in the evolution of the scientific method. Each 
method is important and great in its own way. However 
much the new departure in the scientific method may be 
criticized, it is bound to spread more and more as time gees 
on and as the new type of men and women are born in greater 
numbers in the world, for the Next Step in Evolution is the 
development of the subtler senses, the awakening of the 
intuitive faculty. 

There are signs that a new sub-race is appearing, that a 
" New Age in Consciousness ” is commencing, and that this 
new consciousness touches the intuitional world . 1 But this 
does not mean that we should give up the old well-tried 
inductive method for discovering truth ; it will be used and 
with very gcod results strictly within the domain of science by 
those in whom the intuitive faculty is practically dormant 
And there is no reason why those in whom the subtler senses 
are developing and the intuitive faculty is awakening, should 
not depart from the strict scientific method of induction in 
their researches into the borderland of science. 

In the domain of science also, intuition perhaps plays a 
How IomlUoa more important part than we realize. 

Worb. The illumination may come as the outcome 
of months or years of mental search but the moment when it 
comes the intellect is passive. Take, for example, the flash 
of intuition which came to Kekulfi when he was day- 
dreaming ; he saw a serpent devouring its tail and hit upon 
the theory of a closed chain or ring-structure to explain 
benzene and its derivatives. This had a far-reaching 
effect in the development of one of the most important 
* ” Aotbiopaloar ' several other mcco«rapb« (*e Scbeae). 




WHERE THEOSOPHY AND SCIENCE MEET 57 
sections of organic chemistry. Similarly, a dash of intuition 
cwr.e to Newton when he watched the fall of an apple ; his 
mind was quiet and at rest then, and that was the most 
suitable condition for the intuition to work in and he found 
what he had been searching for. Jagadish Chunder Bo3e, in 
dedicating the Bose Institute on 30 November 1917 as a 
Temple of Learning, brought out this point very clearly when 
he said : " This 1 know, that no vision of truth can come 
except in the absence of all sources of distraction, and when 
the mind has reached the point of res’." 

For the investigation of subtler forces and subtler worlds 
Borderland the employment of subtler senses is re- 
PheBomen*. quired. The use of physical power and 
physical apparatus may be of help up to a certain point, bat 
beyond that point it fails as we have seen in the case of the 
further breaking up of the atomic nucleus. 1 If the scientist 
has not developed these subtler senses in himself then the 
other alternative would be that he might utilize these powers 
in another person and collaborate with him in order to carry 
on his investigations further. Then an immense sub-atomic 
world would open out to him, and what is obscure and hidden 
to him now as regards the " detailed structure and stability 
of different forms of atomic nuclei and the origin of elements " 
in the physical sciences, or the nature of disease in the science 
of medicine, or the nature of consciousness in the science 
of psychology, would be better understood. 

The immediate next phase in scientific research seems 
to be the phase in which scientists will collaborate, in their 
researches into borderland phenomena, with persons who 
have within themselves these subtler faculties developed, of 
penetrating the larger or the smaller worlds which are beyond 



• VUi infra p 14 ; and alio Current Science, J*nu«ry 13S3. p 3*0. Ptes- 
dccul idfliaia by (tbs UleJ Lord Rotheriwtl on ” Trnasmaiwloo of VUrier ", 




THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



58 

the reach of the physical instruments. The scientific method 
is not the only method to discover the truth regarding Man 
and Nature. There arc other methods also of investigation, 
just as there arc other worlds besides the external world of 
the physicist.' 

It would be quite appropriate to point out here, as H. P. 

Limits ttoai of Blavatsky did most truly many years ago, 

SoloEM. (hal .. science cannot> 0W i n g , 0 t h e very 
nature of things, unveil the mystery of the Universe around 
us. Science can, it is true, collect, classify and generalize 
upon phenomena ; but . . . the daring explorer, who would 
probe the inmost secrets of Nature, must transcend the narrow 
limitations of sense, and transfer his consciousness into the 
region of Noumena and the sphere of Primal Causes. To 
effect this he must develop faculties which are . . . dor- 
mant.’" There are latent faculties in man which can be 
developed by suitable training and discipline ; these are just 
as necessary for occult research as is the hard training which 
a scientist has to undergo for scientific research. 

This, again, is an age of specialization. Such an age 
has its place in the intellectual evolution of man and should 
by no means be under-rated, but it has a tendency to narrow 
and cramp the mind. This tendency requires to be concctcd 
and counterbalanced by the synthetic faculty of the mind, a 
mind illuminated with Divine Wisdom of which Theosophy is 
the embodiment. The aim of this Series is to act as a bridge 
between the present and the past, between the known and the 
unknown, and between Theosophy and Science, so as to 
enable one to catch a glimpse of the Divine Plan and recognize 
the value of any special researches in the general scheme of 
things. 



i • 



• Cbcmlitry " luo S<M™|. 



' TU Secret Doctrine, I. 513. 




WHERE THEOSOPHV AND SCIENCE MEET 59 
Just as the metaphysical method of research is a necessary 
ptetam of Mar. phase in the evolution of scientific research, 
Md U.« Dniverse. so WM ,| lc materialism of the nineteenth 
century a nccessaiy stage in the evolution of scientific thought. 
The findings of modern science and the philosophic beliefs 
of some great men of science, such as Sir James Jeans, Sir 
Arthur Eddington, Professor Millikan, General Smuts, to 
mention only n few, are away from the materialism and strict 
determinism of the last century. It is now recognized that 
there is Order and Intelligence in Nature, that there is a Plan, 
and that Plan is Evolution, that evolution is not, as was hitherto 
supposed, " the result of a fortuitous concourse of atoms," but 
that there is mathematical precision, ordered harmony and 
a great design and consequently a Purposive and Directive 
Mind behind the great drama of creation and evolution. 

Though this picture of Man and the Universe of modem 
Science approaches to some extent that given by Theosophy, 
yet it is a very feeble reflection of the grand scheme of 
ccsmogenesis and anthropogenesis given therein. If the latest 
scientific picture is found to be in agreement in some of its 
design with the picture given by Theosophy, then it is possible 
that the rest of the design of the theosophic picture may also 
be true, and it is therefore worthwhile for the scientists to know 
what that whole picture is and to take that as a working 
hypothesis, for who knows it may prove a good guide and 
helpmate in their further investigations- 

We very well realize the difficulties which many of the 
Raaliiation of Die materialist scientists and philosophers of 
DiWcoltlei. more than a generation ago experienced 
in grasping the teachings of Theosophy, for in the firs: 
place they supposed Theosophy to be nothing else but mere 
speculations of the ancients, and mixed it up with orthodox 
religions ; secondly, they were obsessed with the mistaken 




60 THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 

idea of the human race being only a few hundred thousand 
years old or a couple of million years at roost ; thirdly, 
they had no adequate knowledge of the past history of the 
earth and man, or of the existence of the mighty civilisations 
of old and of the history of their rise and fall, etc. Thanks 
to the admirable courage shown by Madame Blavatsky in 
putting forth views which were in advance' of those held 
by nineteenth century orthodox science steeped in materialism, 
orthodox philosophy submerged in classicism, and orthodox 
religions soaked in superstition and distorted by .the slavish 
following of outworn dogmas and soulless traditions ; thanks 
again to the pointed attention drawn by her to the great 
antiquity of man, the greater antiquity of the earth, the 
Contribution* of existence of great ancient civilizations, of 

Thtoiophy, archaic knowledge, of the living Adepts 
in possession of this knowledge and the possibility of coming 
in contact with Them, the Inner Government of the World 
by an Occult Hierarchy, etc. ; thanks once more to the 
valuable researches of modem scholars and scientists and 
their corroborations of many of the statements made in 
1888 by Madame Blavatsky in her monumental work The 
Secret Doctrine and other classic literature of Theosophy, 
the present generation of scientists and philosophers have 
begun to see things in their proper perspective. 

If once the fact is recognized and grasped that what is 
Thaoioph; oiv** known as Theosophy U not a figment of 
High i Value*. the imagination or the speculations of the 
ancients, but that it is the accumulated wisdom of ages 
arrived at by the occult method — a method worthy of study 

1 " It a impoMibie not lo feel the greatest rwpect for Macame Bbralsky'a 
willing* o= this subject (What 1* the Soul ; of rowed, and if the word 
bo permitted, of admiration, writing when *b« did. ihe aaLdpated many 
idea* which, familiar today. ««'• in the higbist degree novel ifly yoari 
ago " iFrorn an article by Prof. C.K.M Joail on “ What is the Soul » " in The 
Arjait Path. May 1917). 




WHERE THEOSOPHY AND SCIENCE MEET 61 
and investigation as the times arc now ripe — then it will be 
realized that the study and knowledge of the whole Plan of 
Evolution as given in Theosophy, beginning with the dim 
past millions of years ago and stretching far into the future, 
is of the greatest importance, for with its help we can see 
the significance of the epoch-making events of the past and 
the present, trace their connection, find a guiding-hand in 
their occurrence, and realize that all of them are intended to 
lead humanity forward to a goal which is glorious and 
wonderful. A grasp of the theosophical outlook heartens 
and inspires us. makes us optimistic, and helps us to give 
right values to all oventa happening in the world, and to 
realize that all is well with the world, and that it is not at the 
tender mercy of unknown forces but guided by the Great 
Masters of the Wisdom to a magnificent end and purpose. 

There is a sequence of psychological phases of con- 
PhMM of sciousncss in evolution and the same succcs- 
CoDMlontoMi. sion of phases is observed in all evolutionary 
cycles, whether of a Root-race, a sub-race or a man, whether 
of an institution or a branch of knowledge. " In every case 
consciousness has been found to work through functions 
which follow each other in definite sequence," which is 
expressed diagrammacically in the table below : 

Table' 

Sequence of Phases of Consciousness : 

1st Phase, Consciousness centred in Perception. 



2 nd 

3rd 

4th 

5th 

6th 

7th 



„ Action. 

„ Emotion. 

„ Analytical Mind. 
„ Synthetic Mind. 
„ Intuition. 

„ Will. 



Marcault oad HawlicMk. Thi fJext Step in BvoJutto*. p.8. 



> 




62 



THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



External nature docs not charge, it is man's understand- 
ing of it that changes. It is the scientist who makes science, 
not science the scientist. And so according to the phase of 
evolution a scientist has reached will he give colouring to his 
science. The phase in the evolution of science and philosophy 
which we see now is nothing but the reflection of the phase in 
the evolution of consciousness reached by the scientist and the 
philosopher. This is a most helpful thought and is brought 
out in a number of monographs in this Series. 

This will explain the necessity of turning one’s attention 
importtMc of to the study of man himself, his inner nature, 
the 8t6dy of M*C. ;, s development and improvement. It is 



gratifying to note that the trend of world-events of some years 
pant, and the impending danger to civilization by the likely 
misuse of nature’s force* discovered by science, have also 
forced pointed attention to, and shown the extreme urgency of, 
the study of man, which has been very much neglected and 
which has now become the centre of scientific study. This 
study of man — of his inner nature and his latent powers — and 
of the superphysical worlds, cannot be done, and it is necessary 
to emphasize this point here, by the orthodox scientific method. 
Theosophy holds the key to the unravelling of the supcrphysical 
mysteries. The scientist of today is the occultist of 



tomorrow. 

In the light of the knowledge of the Plan and of what has 
Pw»e*t Crlili. a been stated above, the crisis through which 
TriotitioDt) Ph*M. we are at present passing and which threatens 
the disruption of our mighty civilization, which has been so 
laboriously built up, is only a transitional phase. We see be- 
fore our very eyes fundamental changes and upheavals in every 
department of life. The old forms arc breaking up as the} 1 
should, in view of the fact that the world is entering upon a 
new age of consciousness. What is needed is to give a correct 




WHERE THEOSOPHY AND SCIENCE MEET 63 
lead lo the thought of the uotld. What we have to be careful 
about is to see that the new forma we build are of the 
right type, so that through them the new life may express 
itself fully. In this revaluation -in all departments of life and 
in the building up of new institutions in place of the old, 
Theosophy will be found to be of the greatest help. 

The present world-crisis is due to the Statc-chariot being 
Cause of Ui« driven by three uncontrolled horses proceed- 
p resent Orisi.. j ng w j t h unequal speed. The first represented 

by Science and Engineering is flying, as it were, with the speed 
of an aeroplane, the second and third represented respectively 
by Economics-Politics and Ethics-Spirituality arc walking 
with the speed of a bullock -cart . What is wanted is a 
uniform steady progress of all the three, so that the State- 
chariot may run smoothly without danger of being dashed to 
pieces. The key to the situation is the study and practice of 
Theosophy. 

The intellectual progress of man has outstripped the 
Does Human progress in his moral and spiritual nature, so 
Datura Change 7 ' much so that some people have begun 
to doubt, to despair and to be despondent whether human 
nature is changing at all. There is no doubt that human 
nature does* change, but extremely slowly in the beginning in 
absence of the knowledge of the Plan ; not knowing what he 
really is, not knowing the purpose and goal of life, man is 
merely drifting on the ocean of life ; but once he becomes 
aware of the Plan and grasps it, once he gets a glimpse of his 
own spiritual and divine nature, once he knows the purpose of 
life and his goal, and knowing that follows the discipb'r.e — 
How th« inner which inculcates the highest morality, the 
Urg. ConifB mos , unselfish life, a life of spontaneous 
service and sacrifice — to bring his dormant divinity into activity 

1 Gomii! Hoard. Science Pnml, 1936, PP- 109172 




64 THE ADYAK LIBRARY BULLETIN 

in his own life, then he feels impelled to take his life into his 
own hands and finds that the unfoldmcnt of his spiritual nature 
now becomes very rapid. Such a man in whom the inner direct- 
ing Self is awakening, in whom the dynamic powers of his spirit- 
ual nature are developing, never becomes a danger to society, 
for he does not only believe in, but is beginning to realize, 
the essential unity of all beings, nay, of the whole creation. 
Look at this question from any angle we may we cannot 
Solution of tba but come to the conclusion that what is re- 
Cri * u quired is right knowledge and understanding 

and a proper perspective. Man has gone out from the centre, 
has conquered the outside world, has gained control over 
nature’s forces and decs not know how to use them ; the 
centrifugal force has been most active in him and this is the 
cause of the present menace to society. He should now change 
his focus, reverse his motion, make the centripetal force more 
and more active, retreat within himself and conquer the 
inner invisible world of his mental, emotional and spiritual 
nature. When he has achieved a balance between these two 
forces within himself then progress will be smooth and uniform. 
A very important thing about Theosophy is that it gives 
ThMiepby *od a rational exposition of the Eternal Truths 

Rational nm. which arc fundamental to all the religions ; 

it gives the modus ofierandi of the noumena and phenomena 
of nature. Theosophy gives the step-by-step process and the 
why and wherefore of religious doctrines, and therefore its 
interpretations appeal to us more than the simple and dog- 
matic assertions of the theologian. The line dividing the 
Free Thought and Rationalistic Movements on the one hand 
and the Thcosophical Movement on the other is very thin. 
Both are opposed to blind belief, superstition, and irrational, 
orthodox religiosity. Both aim at giving a rational exposition 
of troths in nature. Both are highly rational and scientific. 




WHERE THEOSOPHY AND SCIENCE MEET 65 
But the Thcosophical teachings have an advantage over those 
of the Rationalistic school inasmuch a3 they fill up the gaps 
and supply the motive power and give a rationale for the inner 
and upward urge in life by showing the origin of man, his 
purpose in life, his relation to the universe, and his continuous 
evolution ar.d glorious destiny. 

Theosophy is science shorn of its materialism. Theos- 
ophy is philosophy shorn of its classicism. Theosophy is 
religion shorn of its worn-out dogmas and soulless traditions. 
Theosophy is a synthesis of demateriaiized science and philos- 
ophy and liberalized religion. 1 

The beauty of Theosophy is that it not only gives the 
knowledge cf the Plan and the goal, but 
that it is also pre-eminently practical, inas- 
much as it shows the method as to how to 
attain the goal. Many have tried the method and realized 
the goal for themselves. 

The study of Theosophy, then, brings out among others 
the following points : 

1. That there are other worlds besides the physical 
world of the scientist which exist here and now, 
interpenetrating the ccarser physical world, and 
these other worlds are composed of matter very 
much subtler and finer than, and of a different 
type from, that of the physical world.’ 

That there is another method of investigation of 
Truth besides the Inductive Method of the scien- 
tist ; it is called the Occult Method. This Occult 
Method is used for the investigation of the subtler 
worlds noted above. 



Throiephy, 
Pre- eminently 
Practical 



2. 



1 M Science, a Ba*i» for FbHowohy.” a loctore by Locxl Sam*!. Present 
of the British Institute cf Phfloecphy. on tbc cccaaice of tbe Silver Jubilee of 
the Indian Science Congreca, Calcutta, Current Science, January 1938, p 321. 
9 ** Chemistry M (see Scheme). 




Man Htaaelf. the 
lutnncst 
of Reic&rch. 



66 THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 

3. That the scientists seem to have come to the end 
of their resources in the further disintegration of 
the atom, no matter what tremendous power and 
however delicate instruments or complicated ap- 
paratus they use. The projectile used to bombard 
the atom seems to combine with the products of 
disintegration and form other atoms ; disintegra- 
tion is followed by reintegration and artificial 
radioactivity is the result. {Vide supra p. 57.) 
This shows that the scientists will have to make use 
of another method, not the inductive 
method, and another type of instrument 
if they wish to penetrate and investigate 
the worlds beyond the physical. Theosophy demonstrates 
other methods of investigation and other types of instruments 
to be employed. The method to be used is the metaphysical, 
followed by the occult, and the instruments to be used are 
within the person himself. This presupposes a knowledge of 
the constitution of man which Theosophy gives, Theosophy 
says that man i9 more than his body and mind. Theosophy 
again gives the method, and shows how each person may 
convert himself into a suitable instrument by purifying his body, 
emotions and mind by following an altruistic life, and thereby 
developing within himself the requisite instruments of research. 

Theosophy, further, says that man, once he has caught a 
glimpse of the Plan of Evolution, becomes a conscious and 
willing co-operator in helping humanity onwards. In this 
laudable effort, he incidentally develops the capacity to solve 
many of the great problems facing society. Realizing that 
he is a unit in the whole cosmos, recognizing the unity of 
life in the diversity of forms, with its corollary the Brotherhood 
f Man, as facts in nature and not merely as noble ideals, he 
comes more and more capable of using unselfishly the 




WHERE THEOSOPHY AND SCIENCE MEET 67 
powers which present-day science give* him and ihc Mill 
gicalct inner spiritual powers he is likely lo QlUin. This 
again automatically solves another great problem lacing 
the world, namely, the menace to our present civilization by 
the misuse of nature's forces for selfish ends. 

It should not be supposed that this Series, WHERE THEO- 
SOPHY and Science Meet, is intended 
bum fins or only for students of Science and Theosophy, 
tiikoetij. greater mistake could be made. The 

book is meant lor every man and woman who w ill take a 
little trouble to think, for it does not appeal to blind faith. 
It is intended for those who arc dissatisfied with the 
present state of affairs, and arc anxious to do what they 
can for society; it is intended also for those who are 
intellectually discontented and therefore curious to know 
and find out the Truth for themselves. It is again meant 
for those who have in them n spirit of adventure, who arc 
desirous of exploring the Intrnt families mid hidden powers 
within their own selves, of discovering ihc Reality within. 
And this discovery each man has to make fnc/nWW/; no 
other person, however great he may be. can do that for him. 
Th- utmost another person can do is to show the way. but 
the way is to be trodden by each man by himself. 

Action springs from conviction, conviction comes through 
A'6Um.i..u> right understanding, right understanding 
nw< “ 1 'rises from right knowledge. The aim of 
Where Theosophy and Science Meet is to give this 
right knowledge and understanding, also to inspire and stimu- 
late thought. The Series does nnt claim consideration by any 
appeal to dogmatic authority, nor docs it desire or claim to 
teach the doctrine*, but with their help to interpret the world- 
drama, to emphasize the spiritual nature of man. that he is 
more than his body and mind, to show his rightful place in the 




68 THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 

scheme of the universe, and to point out the Next Step in 

Evolution. 

To bring out the aims given above and to show the Plan 
Bchtme of th. of Evolution as given in Theosophy, a 

Bookl tentative scheme is given elsewhere. The 

scheme is merely suggestive. No one is more conscious than the 
editor himself of the many gaps in the scheme. 

The bcok is divided into four parts. Part I treats of 
Nature, of involution from Macrocosm to Microcosm ; Part II 
treats of Man, of evolution from Atom to Man ; Part III treats 
of God, of evolution from Humanity to Divinity ; Part IV 
treats of subjects showing the practical applications of the 
teachings of Theosophy. The order in which the subjects 
arc given in Part III will show the rationale of their arrange- 
ment. It follows the focussing of consciousness in the different 
bodies of man, thus : 

1. The Physical (Physiology). 

2. The Etheric (Western Scientific Research and the 

Etheric Double). 

3. The Emotional (Mythology). 

4. The Mental (concrete, analytical), (Anthropology). 

5. The Mental (abstract, synthetic), (Philosophy and 

Theosophy). 

6. The Intuitional (Psychology). 

7. The Volitional (spiritual), (Yoga). 

The interpretation of the world-drama as given in this 
Series, Where THEOSOPHY AND SCIENCE Meet, in the light 
of the Ancient Wisdom will, it is hoped, give the reader a 
proper background for the conduct of life — a background which 
amplifies that given by Modern Science, and consequently 
gives a proper perspective and a wider outlook on the nature of 
Man and the Universe and their bearing on his life and destiny. 

D. D. KANC.A 




WHERE THEOSOPHY AND SCIENCE MEET 



69 



SCHEME OF THE BOOK 

PART I: NATURE 

(FROM MACROCOSM TO MICROCOSM) 

From Macrocosm to Microcosm 

Man and the Universe 

Geology and The Secret Doctrine Compared 

Archaeology 

The Meaning of Symbols : A Psychological and Philo- 
sophical Survey 

PART II: MAN 

(FROM ATOM TO MAN) 

Matter and the Atom 
Chemistry 

Physics (Light, Sound, etc.) 

Relativity 

Modem Mathematical Thought 
Evolutionary Biology : The Evolution of Form 
From Mineral to Man 

PART III : GOD 

(FROM HUMANITY TO DIVINITY) 
Physiology 

Western Scientific Research and Etheric Double 
Mythology 
Anthropology 
Philosophy and Theosophy 
Psychology 
Yoga 
3 




70 



THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



PART IV : 

SOME PRACTICAL APPLICATIONS 

Methods of Research 

Psychic Research 

Medicine 

Astrology 

Law 

The Practical Application to Politics and Government 

Education 

And What of Art ? 

Whither Science ? 




MANUSCRIPTS NOTES 

III 

(Continued from page 24) 

THE AffVALAYANAGpHYAMANTRABHASYA 
By Dr. C. Kunhak raja 

THE aathor does not quota many works. We find the usual 
sources like YSska and Saunakn. Srati is profusely drawn upon. 
The differences in the readies? among the varies SSkha3 are 
noticed. In the Mysore manuscript there is a reference to S'inis'u. 
mo Br&hroaija. The quotation is as follows. Tathi ca s’inis'u. 
m&rabrahmaqe shUyatc : yaamai namab tato dharmo mOrdhSnani 
ityadi. The following passages are very closely related to the 
passages found in the RgvedabhSaya of Skandasv&nia : 

(1) evam vyakhyRyamSne ’syardhnrcasya vais'vadevatvara 

prasajyeta. tac cSn4Jam. agneyatvafl ce$yate. ato 
gneh pra&adSd iti vfikyas’efeoa bhavitavyam. evam 
vakyns’ejSdhyahare viVveiSm devfinfim epradhanyaro 
agner eva pradhanyam hhavati tan no mitro varuijo 
m&mahantam itivat. P. 45 

This may be compared to what SkandasvSmin says about the 
passage tan no mitro vnruqo mam ahar .tim. This is his statement: 

evam Bgncb prSdbanyam ; mitrSdinaE c&prAdhSnyani. 
ato ’sya sUktasyRgneyatve na vy&ghatab- 

(2) vratapatis'abdas’ ca yady api vratsMm patir '.Tatapatir 

tty evam anvakhyfiyate tathSpi yathS pravtyu’abdah 
prakrajo vtqEyim ity evam anv£khyfiyarr.5nair. pra- 
kreJam&tmsya vicako na vigayfiin eva pmkrjjasva 
evam ayam adhipatimatrasya viicako na vratRn&m 
evadhipateb. tena vratanam ity ctaaya vratapatir ity 
etenSpauparuktyam. P. 159 




72 



THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



This may be compared to what Skandosvamin says about the 
combination valor indram vasupatim. This is his statement : 

vasupati&bcUs tu yady api v&stin&m patir vasopatir 
ity evam vyutp&dyate tathfipi aua svirainam ftha na 
dbaoasyaiva svfiminam. tad yathfi. pravlgas'abdab pra- 
kftfo vto>ftyam ity evam vyutpEdyate. atha ca pr&vlpo 
vyikarage pravlpo vigiyfim iti ca prayogadartfanfit 
prakrsjamatram Aha na viq&yftm eva prak($|am. 

Like the vErarucaniruktasamuccaya, this commentary is also 
very helpful in reconst noting and correcting the commentary on 
the pgvoda by Skandasvamin. 

1 give below a few quotations from the commentary selected 
at random, which may give a better idea of the commentary. 



(1) agnib. rstb draspE s'ubhfte'ubhasya lokapfitatvit. 

(2) bhur bhuvafa avafc svfihfl iti cataspjam vyohrtinam r^ife 

pranfipatLb pttrvafc paramefph). kalpajatvfid vy&brtliifim 
viniadev&isatve prEpte tadapavEdab marynte bhaga- 
vati s'aunakeoa. 

prajEpater vyfihft&yab pQTvaaya paramc^hinab* 
vyastay caiva samastitfea brmhmam aksaram om iti. 
akssifipy eva sarvatra nimittam balavattaram. 

(3) kecid imam man tram Adhy&tmikam manyaote. 

(4) j&nan. kim. adhik&ram asm&dbhaktatfim vi 

(5) kifi ca 8smin Eadbastbc. sfimlpikam idam adhikara^am 

ktlpc gaxgakulam it: yathfi. 

(6) tvayi. niraitta c^ft saptaml cannwji dvlpin&m hanti iti 

yathft. 

(7) anidifjadevatftraantranyiyena asya mantraaya devatfi- 

kalpanam. 

(8 ayam evEgnir vatfrinam -.tyadinS bhE^ye^a. 

(9 ayfiaan. tathfi ca kausitakEnam pE|hab. 

[10 vi^ijur bhagav&a v&sudevab. 

[l 1 tasmai. todarthya es2 caturthL tBdarthyafi ca mas'ake- 
bhyo dhuma iti yathfi. 

(12) dtttaro. sandes’ena yah pre^yate sa du'ta ity ucyate. 

(13) bhadri^i bhajanlyfini bbandanlyiai va. 

(14) dvi$adbbyab. tEdarthya e$H caturthl. tfidarthyaS ca 

aa^ab. ro&3 , akebhyo dhuma iti yathfi* 

(15) cakras'abdab samuhavacanab. brfihmapacakram k$atri- 

>acakram iti yathfi. 

( 16 ) mcdb&m. sakrcchrutagTanthadbfirwjfi tfaktir raedbety 

ucyate. 




REVIEWS 



A New Approach to the Vedas by Annnda K. Coomaraswami. 
Luzac ar/i Scos, London. 

This is a short book of a little over a hundred pages. It is 
as the sab* title shows, an essay in translation and exegesis of 
the vedas. The work contains the BfbuJirwyakopftaiitd I, 2, 
some portions of the Maitri Uponigad and three vcdic hymns, 
namely flgveda X, 129; X, 72 and X, 90. He give3 in the work 
a translation of the text taken up and then also an elaborate 
commentary. At the end there are some extensive notes and an 
appendix. The work is not meant for "professional scholars." 
The author says in the Introduction, “ Meanwhile there are ethers 
beside professional scholars, for whom the vedas are significant. 
In any case no great extension of our present measure of under* 
standing can fce expected from philological research alone, however 
valuable such methods of research may have boao in the past." 
{p. viii). The author starts tho Introduction thus, “ Existing 
translations of vedic texts, however etymologically ‘ accurate ' axo 
too often unintelligible or unoonvincing, sometimes admittedly 
unintelligible to the translator himself." Further on he says, 
“It is very evident that for an understanding of the Vedas, a 
knowledge of Sanskrit, however pro/ound, is insufficient.” (p. vii). 
Again he says, “ As regards the commentary : here I have simply 
used the resources of Vedic and Christian scriptures tide by 
side.’’ (p. ix). These passages show the attitude of the author and 
the method he has followed. One may be quite willing to admit 
that “ Neither the ‘ Sacred Books of the East ’ nor for example 
such translations of the Upani;ads M those of R. E. Hume, or 
those of Mitre, Rosr and Ccwel, recently reprinted, even approach 




74 THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 

the standards set by such works as Thomas Taylors version of 
the Bnnead* of Plotinus, or Fricdlacnder’s of Maimonides' Guide 
j or tkc perplexed*" But when Mr. Ananda K. Coocnaraswami says, 
41 Translators of the Vedas do not seem to have possessed any 
previous knowledge of metaphysics, but rather to have gained 
their first and only notions of ontology from Sanskrit sources," 
one must remark that he has unforunately strayed far out of the 
bound* of legitimate criticism. First of all Mr. Caomaraswami’s 
parallel is not happily selected. Study of Greek and Latin has 
been going on in Europe for centuries; and the European languages 
had long adapted themselves to the needs of expressing classical 
ideas. But when in the nintccnth and the twentieth centuries, 
Sanskrit works were rcndcrod into English there was no convention 
re* aiding the exj nation of Sanskrit words with tho words of 
European languages, as there was between the words of Classical 
languages and the modern European Languages. The stiffness 
of the translations is mostly due to this want of harmony between 
the ianguago of the original and the language into which the 
translation is made. The translations were meant as inter- 
pretations of the texts in a modern language rather than as a 
version in a modern language to satisfy the needs of an ordinary 
reader. The professional scholars' job was to fix the meaning of 
the texts. Secondarily such translations served the needs of those 
who wanted to know the contents of such texts but who were not 
very particular about the philological accuracy of such transla- 
tions. Even after all such statements in the Introduction, when 
Mr. Coomaraawami came to the real task of translation, he had to 
put the Sanskrit word within brackets after the translation in 
many cases. As for polish of language in translation and the 
imderstandability of tbc translation, this is a matter of opinion. 
Personally I am afraid that after his attack on the professional 
scholars, he has not surpassed them either in tho matter of free 
language nor in the matter of underslandability. But in tbc 
matter c£ philological accuracy, he falls far short of the professional 




REVIEWS 



75 



scholar. ! nni not at all certain il the present translation will be 
in any way a Iwtlci help for persons other than professional 
scholars to understand the text, thnn the translations that have 
already appeared and have been mentioned by the author in 
the Introduction. Mr. Coomaniflwnmi has tried to he accurate and 
in this effort he Ibis sacrificed the purity of language. Hut he has 
not been able to be pliilologically accurate alto. In the matter 
of translation, it would have lieen far better if he had taken the 
translation from some recognized work. When we come to the 
commentary and the notes, it must lie said that the author has done 
a distinct survico to students of Indian Religion. Tire commentary 
and notes show a thoroughness of schoiarshio and a power of 
grasping highly obstmse subjects in a clear way and studying them 
in the light of allied subjects. The author has shown a new way 
of approach to the study of the Vodos and in tho method folJowod 
here he has fully justified the title that he has given to the work. 
We whole-heartedly welcome this work and wo hope that the 
path shown by the author will be followed by ocher exponents of 
Hindu religion. 

Editor 



S’ am/ Siddhanta (in the ?deylaujda S’&stra) by Miss Violet 
Paranjoti, M.A., L.T., Ph. D., Isabella Thoburn College. Lucknow. 
Luzac and Co., London, 1938. Price Ra 4 or 6 sh. 

This is tbo Dissertation submitted by the author for the 
Degree of Ph. D. in the Madras University. In this work tho 
author has made full use of the Literature contained in Tamil on 
the subject. There are practically few books on the subjects. 
Besides a deer exposition of tho subject in a masterly way the 
author has drawn attention to other religions and pointed out the 
relation of the Saiva Siddhanta to other religions. The work 
contains nine chapters dealing with (l) the Literature, (2) epesti- 
mology, (3) God, (4) Mfiya and its evolutes, (3) proofs of the 
existence of the soul, (6) the impurity-fettered soul, (7) the freeing 




76 



THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



of such a soul, (8) release and (9) the alien schools in relation to 
the ffaiva SiddhfinW. This shows that the treatment of tlie subject 
is very comprehensive, done in a comparative and critical way. 
We congratulate the author on the splendid success of her under- 
taking and we thank her for giving us such a clear exposition of 
an Improtant subject on which works accessible to the genera! 
student and reader are very few. 

Editor 



Maxims of 'Ali. Translated by J. A. Chapman. With an 
Urudu Foreword by Snams-Ul-Ulama Maulana Sayyid Nasir 
Husain, Pages xii, 71. The Oxford University Press, 1937. 
Price Re 1-8. 

This useful little book contains the sayings of ’Alt the son-in- 
law of the Prophet and the " greatest hero ol Islam.” Several 
collections of varying sixes have been made to collect the teachings 
of 'Ali, from his own sermons. 'Alt's distinction ns an orator and 
teacher of Islam is held to be next in rank only to that of the 
Prophet himself. 

In spite of the great difficulties that becct the translator, 
Mr. Chapman has rendered a great literary service to the English- 
speaking world by this translation. The maxims embodied in the 
book under review are eternal truths useful to all people at all times. 
There is little in this book that ran be said to be controversial. 
There are several epigrams which require deep reflection and assimi- 
lation. Useful advice of how to get on in a world of passion aod 
intrigue, in a world full of temptations and selfishness, is given in 
the most direct manner. It is a welcome addition to all thinking 
persons and the value of a beck of this kind can never be over- 
estimated, for we often require to be reminded of our short comings 
and their remedies. 

a. N. Krishna* 



I. Lecture* on The Bhagavad Gila by D. S. Sanna, M- A., 
Principal, Government Arts College, Rajaiimuodry, Published 




HE VIEWS 77 

by N. Subha Kao Pontulu, President of the Hindu Samaj, 
Rajahmundry, 1937. Pages xiii, 213. 

II, Tlia Bhagavad Git< i by D. S. Sarma, M.A., Principal, 
Government Arts College, Rajahmundry, Text, Translation with 
Introduction and Notes, Second Edition, pp. Ixi, 287. Published 
by the Madras Law Journal Office, Mylnpore, 1936. 

III. The Bhagavad Gita with Text in Devanagari and Eng- 
lish Translation by D. S. Sarma, M.A., Principal, Government 
Art9 College, Rajahmundry, Second Edition, pp. vi, 212. The 
Madras Law Journal Office, Mylnporo, 1936. Price Annas Four. 

IV. Stimuli Bhagavad Gita (Text of the Suddha Dharmn 
Man dal am edition), Publised by T. M. Janardannni for the Suddha 
Dharma Mrutdalam Association, The Suddha Dhortna Office. 
Mylapore, Madias, S. India. (For piesenlalion only). 

Professor D. S. Sarma, already well known os the author of 
some well-written books on Hinduism, has embodied in his Lec- 
tures on the Bhagavad Gita his views and impressions. Professor 
Radhakrishnan, writing the ' Foreword', concludes thus, while 
commending the suggestion of Professor Sarma that ono should set 
apart a few minutes every day for prayer and meditation ; that the 
Gita should be read slowly allowing each word to sink into our 
consciousness which would enable a person to absorb its thoughts; 
and this absorption would make one realize that we live here for a 
purpose larger than we can see (p. xili). 

The approach of Professor Sarma to the Gtta is not of the 
traditional type. In the first lecture be mentions the several 
methods of reading the Gita, e.g. the ritualistic way, the theologian'6 
way, the method of the critical European scholar prompted by 
intellectual curiosity and lastly, the old-time Christian Missionary 
method of reading tho GUa with a view to find fault with its 
teachings. Mr. Sarma argues that his method is different from all 
these. According to him, religion is something that intrcduces 
order and singleness of aim into the manifold activities of man that 
would otherwise remain chaotic. Religion bss been the mainstay for 




78 



THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



the continuance of humanity throughout. Therefore, Mr. Sarma's 
aim in roaxnmending the study of the Gtfa to our young 
men, is not merely as a dope but as something which will furnish 
them with the necessary soul-force and faith in the God (pp. 4-S). 
To Mr. Sarma the appeal of looking upon the Glia as the divine 
Mother is the real feeling of every Hindu (p. 8). 

In advocating a study of the Gila Mr. Sarma recommends 
that the Gita must be studied as a practical guide to everyday life ; 
that it may be studied either in the original or in the vernacular 
versions ; that in the early stages one would be wiser to confine him- 
self to the tore text. Mr. Sarma gives his personal suggestions to 
the student who would like to make the Grfir his spiritual guide. 
This can be successfully done only by reading the text over and 
over again, marking and pondering over such passages as require 
further elucidation c* appeal to the individual most. The real help 
in the interpretation of the Gita is the habit of meditation. Thus, 
Professor Sarma strikes a clearly personal noto and a personal ap- 
proach to the study of the Gita. 

In the second lecture the various component words of the colo- 
phon of the Gita are analyzed.. These words convey to Professor 
Sarma an toner significance aDd a personal appeal. He does not 
agree with the division of the Gita into the throe sections of six 
chapters each. He has reasons to believe that there are gaps in the 
Gita which might have remained obscure but for the great commen- 
tators. He is able to distinguish two main streams, the ethical and 
the metaphysical, which are very much mixed and to die beginner 
would cause not a little difficulty. Mr. Sarma would therefore inter- 
pret the Gita as covering the whole way of man's pilgrimage to the 
feet of God. This is the song of the Lord. By being raised to the 
rank of an Upani^od the teaching of the Gita is accepted a9 
authoritative and Hinduism has reaffirmed its faith in the principle 
of graded progress that underlies its ancient scheme of four is'ramaa. 
The Gita is also the yogasostra. The teacher represents the 
Absolute Principle and Arjuna is the symbol of the man or afflicted 




REVIEWS 79 

mul. The conversation between Kiwja and Arjuna takes place at 
a supreme crisis in the history of our people (p. 28). 

In the third lecture Mr. Sarnia tries to define and understand 
the term spiritual life. To him it begins with the awakening "and 
proceeds along Karma and Bhakti and reaches its culmination in 
JEkiia. But there .are no hard and fast lines between one phase 
and another. Spiritual life is not a staircase in which we can 
count the steps. It is a gentle slope that leads us to the feet of 
God." (p. 41). 

The attitude of the Gila towards contemporary Schools of 
Thought forms the subject matter of the fourth lecture. The great 
work is not intolerant or narrow. It strikes the golden mean and 
the method followed is the same whether it has to deal with 
ritualists or ascetics, with scientists or polytheists or quietiats. It 
sympathizes with them, recognizes the elements of value in their 
thought and practice, but gontly points out the error of their ways, 
throws light on their limitations and leads them to a higher and 
better way (p. 53). 

To Mr. Sarnia tho Gua strikes an extrwdinarily modern note 
in certain respects. Man has a body and a soul which belong to 
opposing Influences; what is the relation between the two, is the 
real question. In other words, what is the svtidharma of man. 
Wading through the different statements of the Gift* Mr. Sarma 
dees not agree with the view of the ascetics who are out for the 
eradication of all natural desires, for in certain places K&ma or 
desire is identified with the Supreme Being when cot opposed to 
Dharraa (p. 56). Mr. Sarma finds in the Greek Arete aa equivalent 
nearer than any English word. Just as Arete has an individual 
and an universal aspect, we have Dharma which is universal and sva- 
dkarma which is personal. Svadharma enables one to achieve the 
best that he is capable of, by perfecting hi* natural endowments 
and by making moat of his circumstances. Thus, the Gita connects 
svadharma with svabhOva. It connotes ease, spontaneity, and 
efficiency ; not only these, but also grace and beauty. 




80 



THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



Id the sixth and last lecture, Mr. Sarnia tries to answer same 
of the charges levelled against Hinduism by the westerners. 
Whether the Gtta has any remedy to suggest with reference to 
social evils, or is it only the culmination of a selfish spirit of 
monkish jxety ? Has it no thought for the suffering humanity a! 
large ? In solving these burning Questions of the day, Mr. Sarnia 
lays emphasis that here again the Gita should be taken as a practical 
gospel and Dot treated as scripture. He arrives at the following 
conclusions Lasod on an intensive study of the Gita : 

(t) Dharma is so called becauso it maintains the social order ; 
and to accuse the culture of a nation which has produced all the 
secular s'Sstraa and which has, above ail, built up the edifice of the 
VanjaHs'rama-dharma of being anti-sodoJ or other-wordly, is only 
ridiculous (p. 69). 

(2) To the Hindu thinkers all progress in human history’ 
has to be looked upon as an aspect or phase of the progress seen 
in the order of creation. That is, it has to be judged according 
to the degree of the conquest of spirit over matter. It has to be 
tested by the standard of spiritual values. The question, according- 
ly, is to the particular age or yuga. The criteria employed in 
the different standards set for the different yugas can be seen in 
the epics written by Vftlmiki aod Vyasa (pp. 73-4). 

(3) The Gita does not tolerate the nan who lays down the 
law for himself either. It advises us to go to the scriptures but 
warns us against following the letter instead of the spirit (p- 85). 

Mr. Sarnia sums up his position with the following words : 
" With us progress is the process of the perfection of Dharma. 
And the perfection of Dharma implies both the perfection of the 
individual and the perfection of society. In fact, we cannot have 
the one without the other. They both act and react on each 
other. Therefore, we believe that nations and their civilizations 
have to be judged ultimately by the same standards as individuals 
and their characters. We cannot have one set of values for the 
citizen and another set of values for the state." The Gita preaches 




REVIEWS 81 

the highest harmony and happiness, not only for the individual 
but for the humanity at large— P eacb. 

In the three Appendices that follow, the speeches of the three 
Indian patriots are reprinted, viz. Gita : The Universal Mother 
by Mr. Gandhi ; Gita : The Celestial Fruit by die late 

Mr. B. G. Tilak and GUa : The Treasure House of Dturrma by 
Pandit Madan Mohan Malaviya. 

The latter part of the book contains the English rendering 
of the GUa by Professor Sarnia, without the text. This is the 
same as the two other translations which are being taken up for 
review. We must diank Professor Sarma for the sincerity with 
whtch he speaks his convictions and the value which he attaches 
to the study of the Gita by pondering over one verse after another 
and assimilating its teachings slowly and by the personal method 
o( meditating and undorstading. This would make every tenet of 
the teachings of the Gita part of the individual and act as a 
practical guide in daily life which is the aim of the author. 

II 

The Student’s Edition of the Bkaga\>ad Gita with the text 
in Devanagari and translation by die same author is now running 
its second edition. Ir. an elaborate introduction running to sixty- 
one pages Mr. Sarnia has tried to compress his views on the 
age, the form, the message and the synthesis of the Gita. He 
follows the Historical Method in the determination of the age. 
Ab an episode in die Mahabharata it occurs just before the 
momentous battle. As the chosen instrument of Divine justice 
the most important role is assigned to Arjuna. Sri Krsija stands 
for the Supreme Deity which gives the necessary strength to the 
faltering Arjuna. Mr. Sartna pleads for a very liberal interpreta- 
tion of the Gita without narrowing it to any particular school of 
thought or critical criterion. 

The Notes following the text are useful to the student-begin- 
ners and are calculated to supply certain missing data for a complete 




82 



THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



understanding of the Gila. They are also critical in that the 
author states his reason for adopting a particular reading in the text 
in preference to others. 

The Appendices A and B contain an extract from the writings 
of Mr. Gandhi in the YOUNG INDIA and one from the writings of 
Arobindo Gkote about the Gita and Caste System. In welcoming 
this translation of the Gita one cannot forget the impetus which 
Dr. Be6ant gave to the study of that great work by her first trans- 
lation a generation ago. Tho impact of that movement can still 
befdt. 



III 

This edition of the Offer with the text and translation, is a 
cheaper edition of the earlier student's edition. This is also run- 
ning its second edition and is priced at the low figure of Annas 
Form per copy. This is perhaps intended to reach a larger public 
by placing it within the reach of all. In the short introduction, 
Processor Sarnia tries to analyze the content of the Gita in its 
triple aspect of Karma, Bhakti and J Afina yogas hut at the same 
time warns against looking at the teachings of tho Gita as at a 
suitcase. The Gita, acording to Professor Sarma is unique in 
that it embraces all forms of spiritualism and appeals to all alike. 

IV 



The Suddha Dhorma Mandalam edition of the Gita is some- 
what different from our Gita. Foe one thing, it contains more 
verses than the extant versions of the Bhagavad Gita. Its divisions 
and names of the chapters are also different The colophon at 
the end of each chapter is different form the extant versions of the 
Gita. I give below a comparative statement of some of the differ- 
ent chapter headings in the ordinary edition and that of the Suddha 
Dharma Mandalam edition as examples. 




ftf 



REVIEWS 83 

SUDPHA DHARMA MASDALAM 
EDITION 

Gttavatflraniruptujarr. n a m a 
vya$ti pragavirthaparafc, etc- 
SSnkhyakarjde Jfifinasajke 
Nara N&rayfiqadharma gUa 
ofima 

AvatSraglta n5ma, etc. 
Adbikaragltft nfima 
S’lk^Sfitta 
K5nujagtti 
Kavailyaglia 

Sinkhya Kaijde Bhakti§stke 
svarGpagltS 
SBdhanatryagiti 
MflySglta 
Molqagtti 
Brahmas vbUpagi t5 
PraJjariurnglti 
Paramfttmagltfi 

8. Akyua brahma yoga AksruagltS 

9. Rajavidyaraja guhya yoga Raiavidyaglta 

There are twenty-six chapter* ia the latter edition. The 
arrangement of the same material into 26 chapters i* a special feature 
Suddha Dhorma edition. The index of half-verses at the end 
book will be useful for purpose of reference to the workers 
field. 



Chap. Ordinary 
EDITION 

1. Arjuaa vis'idayoga 

2. SSukhya yoga 

3. Karma yoga 

4. Jfl&na yoga 

5. Sanyasa yoga 

6. Dhyana yoga 

7. Vijfiana yoga 



A. N. Krishnan 




THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



Next? Calalogus Ca/aJogorum: A complete and up-to-date 
Alpliabetical Register of Sanskrit and Allied Works and Authors, 
published under the Authority of the University of Madras, 
edited by an Editorial Committee consisting of MabamahopBdhyiya 
Prof. S. Kuppuswami Sastri, M.A., I.E.S. (Retd.) Editor-in Chief, 
Prof. P. P. Su brahman ya Sastri, M.A., B.A. (Oxon.) and C. Kunhan 
Raja, B.A. (Hons-), D. PHIL. (Oxoo.). 

The University of Madras has done well in undertaking the 
publication of the above catalogue, and all lovers of Sanskrit will 
remain grateful to the University for the generous undertaking. It 
is high time to revise Dr. Aufrecht's Cataloeus Catalogorum and 
bring it over as an up-to-date and iaditpensible book of reference for 
the Orientalists at large after an interval of more than thlity-five 
years during which time &> many important collections of 
manuscripts have been brought to light and several catalogues 
have been published in India and abroad. It :s also highly com- 
mendable that the Editors have decided to includo all fcooksoa 
Buddhism and Jainism which are available in Sanskrit, Pflli, Prflktt, 
Tibetan and Chinese languages. I wish to suggest here one or two 
points by way of improving the Catalogue so far as the Buddhist 
Literature is concerned. 

It would be desirable for the Editors to pay greater attention in 
dealing with the Buddhist Literature, so that some of the glaring 
errors might have been avoided. For example on page 6 b, under 
the entry, ak^ayam uliparip^ccha, the reference is given to the 
Kyoto Catalogue thus : Kanjur Kyoto, II, 14. It ought to be 
corrected into— Kyoto 1 1, 760 (14). Similarly, on page 8a, under the 
entry, akfobhyatalhagatavyuJia, we have to correct Kyoto II, 6 
into Kyoto II, 760 (6), Again on page 66, under the same entry 
akjajamati the Sikfitaamuxaya is statod to to a work of 
Jayadeval It U well-known that the author of the Sik$Bs, is 
S’Sntideva and not Jayadeva. The name of the translator of the 
aksobhyasutra oo page 8a is Lckarakja according to Nanjio, not 
Lokaksema as printed here. Similarly we have to correct on page 7b 




REVIEWS 



85 



ak&raatitakanSmavrtti 'mioak/tarasniakavrUinSma. On page. 8a 
a work willed Srtcakrasamvarasebapntknyil (printed, — sekamkri-) 
is entered under the author, Akfcbhyavajra. The same work, 
according to the Tibetan Index, is translated under another title, 
Srlcakrasamvarastotra. Therefore, that work also is to be 
mentioned here. On the same page b a work is mentioned under 
the title Ak?obyasfldhana. Its proper title is bhegavadakfobhya ; 
hence it must be put under bh-serie*. Name of the author of 
a.i?abhyBnui<rngiha— is Sabaripada and not Saharipad as printed 
in the catalogue (86). Viravajra, tho author of ak?obhyopkyi- 
kapatrika (86), is also called S'uravajra. Both forms are given 
by Cordier and we must have it * Viravajra or S'tiravajra '. In 
some places certain works seem to have escaped the attention of 
the editors and hence omitted completely; annasamaya, forex- 
ample, (Cor. p. 255) which is to be entered after AngavaidyanidCna 
page 336, is not done so. On page 5a under the entry, akutobhayS, 
it is itated that it is Nagarjuna’s own gloss on his Madhya- 
nakakirikas. Though it is generally believed to, the author of 
the gloss cannot be taken to be the same person as Nagiriuna 
himself, since the gloss contains quotations from Aryadcva. It is, 
therefore, according to tho Chinese version, attributed to one 
Pingai&kga. In places like this, it may t« useful to mention the 
differences of opinion. 

It may not be out of place here to bear in mind the fact that 
a very groat number of Buddhist works, more than 2,000 in number 
are hidden in translations into foreign languages, vim, Chinese 
and Tibetan and that only a small number of books are available 
in Sanskrit at present. Fortunately for us, all the available 
translations of the Buddhist works have been carefully catalogued 
by several scholars and those catalogues will be useful for the 
present task. Some of them are mentioned by the editors in the 
preface among the list of catalogues consulted for the purpose. It 
is to be pointed out here that though the titles of the books in 
most cases are given in Sanskrit by the catalogue-compilers, yet 




86 



THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



there arc many more works whose 9anskrit titles are not supplied 
by them. Unless those boots are also included in the present 
catalogue, it cannot be said to be a complete Register. In this 
respect, even the provisional part of the catalogue now issued, 
remains incomplete, I may mention one book as an example 
here. Agnipulaprayamoia dhanm, a Sanskrit work, recorded in 
Kanjur, is not entered in the catalogue. 

As already pointed out above, Buddhist Literature for the 
most part is available only in Chinese and Tibetan translations ; 
and we owe much to ancient acaryas who translated those works 
into foreign languages in cooperation with the native scholars ol 
the respective countries. They were not mere translators, they 
were true interpreters as well and they worked heart and soul in 
those lands for the cause of spreading the ancient Indian culture 
in foreign countries. Therefore they may also b« considered to bo 
real authors of some valuable works. It will not therefore, be 
inappropriate on the port of editors to include the names of those 
icfliyas cf ancient India in the Sew Catalogue Catalogorum. 

N. Aiyaswami Sastri 



Suddha ( Sana tana) Dharma : Suddha Dharma Mandalam 
Pamphlet No. 4, The Suddha Dharma Office, Mylapore, Madras, 
S. india. 

This a a short paper read at tho Convention of Religions at 
Puri in Juno 1936 with the Raja of Puri as President. The main 
object of this pamphlet is to enable the general public to have a 
fairly distinct knowledge about Suddha Dharma as regards its 
philosophy, principles and practice. The message of the Suddha 
Dharma is given in the five verses at the beginning. Then follows 
an account of the principles and practice of that Dharma- The 
history of the Mandalam and the Literature are attempted to be 
surveyed only feebly. The References at the end supply the texts 
on which the statements in the body of the book arc based. 

A. N. Krishnan 




REVIEWS 



87 



Srec Guru Thathwa Vinuiraam Iiy Brahmasree N. Subramanya 
Aiynr, President- Founder, Srec Btnhmnvidya Vironrsini Sabha, 
89, Loyds Road, Rovnpettah, Madras. 

Tli is is Ibe second of the series of books, projected by the 
above Sabha and investigates into the truth about the nature of the 
principle of teacherihip. It is a disquisition which brings in a lot of 
relevant literature into the discussion and narrates stories to show 
the high pedestal which has been assigned to the AcSrya in our 
society. The relevant topics of the various names of the teacher, 
the truth and significance of guruship, the guruparampara are all 
dealt with, and an attempt is made to collate the tattvas with the 
various matika^aras. The Gurv/tryllslava and the Mnhatcdos'i- 
wlU’itls/otra are printed at the end of the book. This is a book 
interpreting the principle of gurnship in accordance with the Ad- 
vaita School and reconciling the teachings of the S'rt Vidya School 
with the teachings of the former. A. N. KR1SHNAN 



Professor Hermann Jacobi passed away on the 
21 st of October 1937. He was nearly 88 yean of 
age at that time. He was born at Cologne on the 1 1th 
February 1850 as the son of a business man. He 
was educated at Cologne. Berlin and Bonn. He was 
Professor at Moenstsr, Kiol and Bonn Universities. 
He joined the last University in 1899. He visited 
India in 1873-74. He was one of the greatest Sans- 
krit Scholars of Europe. In his death Sanskrit 
Scholarship ha* sustained a loss which can never bo 
repaired. He was a versatile scholar and equally 
profound and thorough in all the branches of Sanskrit 
Learning which he handled. His name is best known 
for the stand he made in maintaining the date of 
Rgveda as far anterior to wbat Max Muller had 
computed. Jacobi made his stand, along with the 
late Bal Gangadhar Tilak, on astronomical basis. 
We record our deep sense of sorrow at the passing 
away of this great scholar. 




EDITORIAL NOTES 

We are very happy that more and more Oriental 
Periodicals of established reputation are coming into 
exchange relations with our Bulletin. This is a recog- 
nition that we are doing some useful work. We have 
never been anxious about the financial aspect. The 
Adyar Library publications have never been a source 
of income ; in this enterprise we have been always 
working on a loss. But if there is a recognition that 
we are doing some useful work, we are very well grati- 
fied and we feel that we have been amply compensated 
for our money spent on these publications and the 
labour needed for the publications. We need not 
specify the periodicals that have come into exchange 
relations. We publish the whole list at the end of 
the issue. 

Our work of preparing a Descriptive Catalogue 
of the Adyar Library is progressing. In this connec- 
tion we may appeal to some other Libraries to prepare 
reliable catalogues and to publish them. There are 
many MSS. Libraries which do not have a catalogue 
accessible to scholars. There are good collections in 
Baroda, in the two Libraries in Lahore and at Shanti- 
niketan. The catalogue of the Baroda collection is 




EDITORIAL NOTES 



89 



not yet complete. There is no catalogue of the two 
collections in Lahore (The University Library and the 
Library of the D. A. V. College) available in print. 
The collection in Shantiniketan too has no published 
catalogue. Unless these collections are properly cata- 
logued and unless these catalogues are incorporated in 
the Catalogue Catalogorum its value will be certainly 
lessened. It is hoped that those who are in charge of 
these Libraries will prepare catalogues and give the 
opportunity to the Editors of the Catalogus Cata- 
logorum to incorporate their contents in the great work 
We have received some remarks that in the Con- 
tents of the Bulletin, the name of Dr. C. Kunhan Raja 
appears too prominently. Practically the entire mat- 
ter is from the pen of Dr. C. Kunhan Raja. We have 
only to say that by the very nature of things, a little 
lack of variety in the matter of contributors is what 
cannot be helped. When we started the Bulletin we 
made it quite plain that this is not a general periodical 
in which contributions of scholars will be published. 
Our aim in starting the Bulletin was to make it a 
channel for communicating information regarding the 
Library to scholars. As such those who work in the 
Library have to contribute to the journal predominant- 
ly. It will be noticed that others working in the 
Library or for the Library are also contributing mater- 
ial for the Bulletin. It is true that the same names 
re-appear issue after issue. In a Library- Bulletin this 
cannot be helped. But the suggestion that there is 
undue prominence to a particular name is not true. 




90 



THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



We have been paying special attention to the 
Vedic Literature. Recently a large number of pre- 
Sayapa Vcdic Commentaries have come to light. In 
order to understand the condition of Vedic exegesis in 
medieval India, it is necessary to publish them. For 
many of them, manustripts are available only in a few 
Libraries ; for some of them there is only a single 
manuscript. We consider the publication of these 
commentaries a very urgent matter ; and so we have 
given more prominence to the Vedic side. 

Wc arc happy to note that Dr. Lakshman Sarup 
has started his edition of the FJgveda Commentary of 
Madhava son of VeftkatUrya. After seeing the edition 
of the Commentary on YSska’s Nirukta by Mahcsvara 
covering nearly 1,500 pages brought out by the learned 
Doctor, we are convinced that patient work and deep 
scholarship are essential factors in such undertakings. 
We note with special satisfaction in the announcement 
of the edition of the Figveda Commentary the following 
sentence : “ Another noteworthy feature of this edition 
is that best efforts have been made to keep the text 
free from mistakes which are generally found in other 
editions." It is found that the first volume (there will 
be six volumes) containing 800 pages will cost Rs. 40. 
The price may be considered a little too high. Wc 
have ourselves undertaken the publication of certain 
very important Vcdic works. We have helped other 
institutions and scholars with manuscripts in bringing 
out such publications. We welcome the undertaking 
of Dr. Lakshman Sarup. 




EDITORIAL NOTES 



91 



In publishing the commentary on the Rgveda by 
another MSdhava we are publishing also the commen- 
tary of MSdhava son of VertkatSrya. Our aim is not to 
bring out a critical edition of this latter commentary. 
We include it in our edition only for the purpose of 
comparison. The problem of these two Msdhavas 
has yet to be solved. We will continue the publication 
till the end of the first A§taka, which is the portion that 
is available for the MSdhava commentary which we are 
editing. We are happy that a critical edition of the 
commentary of MSdhava son of Vchkatarya is also 
soon to appear. 

We may mention something about our serial 
publications. We have no intention of publishing the 
entire book in the Bulletin serially. That will take 
unduly long time to finish. We propose to publish in 
the Bulletin only small portions of the works. Then 
the entire work will be issued in the form of a book. 
For those who have been subscribing for the Bulletin 
at the time when the work appeared serially, the whole 
book will be available at a greatly reduced rate, so that 
the subscribers arc not losers by having already paid 
for the portion that had appeared in the Bulletin. 

We are receiving some important publications for 
Review in the Bulletin. All books for Review in the 
Bulletin may be sent to the Editor and the books will 
be reviewed very promptly. 

Mr. A. N. Krishna Ayyangar, the Assistant Editor 
and Mr. N. Aiyaswami Sastri who isalso working for the 
Bulletin, were Delegates from the Adyar Library to the 




92 THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 

Trivandrum Session of the All-India Oriental Confer- 
ence. Both of them participated in the proceedings by 
reading Papers at their respective Sessions. 

Recently a very useful work has appeared from 
the Visvcsvarananda Vedic Research Institute, Lahore, 
in the form of a word index to the Brahmaijas and the 
Araoyakas. In the large number of pre-Sayaija com- 
mentaries on the Vedic Texts which have come to light 
in recent years there are profuse quotations from 
various Br3hmapas. In order to enable scholars to 
trace such quotations, this index is of invaluable help. 
The task undertaken by the Institute is a very stupend- 
ous one, involving both money and labour. We 
congratulate the authorities of the Institute on their 
performance and wish them all success in continuing 
the work and completing the scheme. The absence of 
indices is one of the handicaps which a Sanskrit Scholar 
has to labour under whenever he has to trace up pas- 
sages to their sources. The work done by the Bhandar- 
kar Institute, Poona, and by the Visvesvarananda 
Vedic Research Institute, Lahore, will earn the grati- 
tude of all Oriental scholars. We know that a large 
amount of money is needed for the successful comple- 
tion of the work. We make our appeal to Governments 
and Universities to co-operate with this institute in this 
great undertaking by rendering financial aid. 




OUR EXCHANGES 

Tho Adhyfltma Pralt&s'a. 

The Andhra Sflhitya Parisat Patrikft. 

The Archiv Orlenlilcf. 

The Aryan Path. 

The Annals of Oriental Research, Madras University. 

The Bbfirata Dharma. 

The Bhflrata Mitra. 

The Buddha Prabha, Bombay. 

The Bulletin of the Museum of Fine Arts, Boston. 

The Bulletin L’Ecole Francaise D’Extrime Orient, Hanoi. 
I ado China. 

The Bulletin of the New York Public Library. 

The Cochin Government Archsoologist, Trichur. 

The Director of Archaeology, Nizam’s Dominions, Hyderabad. 
The Eastern Buddhist, Japan. 

The Federated India, Madras. 

The Hindu, Madras (Sunday Edition), 

The Indian Culture, Calcutta. 

The Indian Historical Quarterly, Calcutta. 

The Indian Review, Madras. 

The Indian Social Reformer, Bombay. 

The Inner Culture. 

The Jaina Antiquary. 

Tho Jaina Gazette, Ajitashram, Lucknow. 

The Journal of the American Oriental Society, New Haven, 
Conn. U.S.A. 

The Journal of the Andhra Historical Research Society, 
Rajahmundry. 

The Journal of the Annamalai University. 

The Journal of the Benares Hindu University. 

The Journal of the Bihar and Orissa Research Society. 

The Journal of the Bombay hranch of the Royal Asiatic 
Society, Town Hall, Bombay. 

The Journal of the University cf Bombay. 

The Journal of the Greater India Society. 

The Journal of Indian History, MyJapore, Madras. 

The Journal of the K. R. Kama Oriental Institute, 

The Journal of the Madras Geographical Association. 

The Journal of Oriental Research, Mjdapote. 

Tho KalaircagaL 

The Kamajaba Historical Review, Dharwar. 

The Karaijaka Sahitya Parisat Patrikfl. 




94 



THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



The Maharaja’s Sanskrit College Magazine, Mysore. 

The MlmSmcB I’rakis'a, Poona. 

The Missouri University Studies. 

The Mysore Archaeological Serics- 

The Nigad PracSrini PatnliB, Benares City. 

The New Review, Calcutta. 

The New Times and Ethiopia News. 

The Oriental Literary Digest, Poona. 

The Philosophical Quarterly, Amalner. 

The Poona Orientalist. 

The Prabuddha KarnSJaka, Mysore. 

The Progress To-day, London. 

The Quarterly Journal of the Mythic Society, Bangalore. 
The Religions, London. 

The Rama Varma Research Institute, Trichur. 

The Saqiskpta Ratnakara, Jaipur. 

The Saipskpta S&bitya Parisat Pattika, Calcutta. 

The Sentamil, Madura. 

The Shrt, Kashmir. 

The Sudd ha Dhaima, Myiupoie. 

The Tbeosophical World, Adyar. 

The Theosophist, Adyar. 

The Udyfina Patriki, Tiruvadi, Tanjore District. 

The Vishvabharati Quarterly, Shantiniketan. 

The Weo kl-peoce, Calcutta. 

The Z. D. M. G. 



RELIGIONS 

The Journal of the 
Society for the Study of Religions 

Edited for tho Executive Committee by F. Victor Fialinr 
President of the Society 

THe Most Hok. Thb Marquess op Zetland, P.C.. G.C.S.I., G.C.I.B 
Chairman of the Executive Committee: 

Six E. Dbkison Roea. C.I.E.. Pb.D. 

Application for Membership should be sent to: 

This Hon. Secabta*y. 

53. John Street. Bedford Row. 

LcckJoh. W.C.l 

Membership Subscription 10*- P*r annum 
Prated and pubfctbed by C. Sobbararndu, At the Vasanta Press. Ad var, Madars 






TIIE LAW OF SACRIFICE 



Devas performed a sacrifice of Him who 
was the cmlxxhmcnt of sacrifice ; and 
they were the first Dharma. 



By Ann’ih Besant 

[ Extract from " The Ancient Wisdom ”J 

The study of the Law of Sacrifice follows naturally on 
the study of the Law of Karma, and the understanding 
of the former, it was once remarked by a Master, is as 
necessary for the world as the understanding of the 
latter. By an act of Self-sacrifice the Logos became 
manifest for the emanation of the universe, by sacrifice 
the universe is maintained, and by sacrifice man reaches 
perfection.' Hence every religion that springs from 
the Ancient Wisdom has sacrifice as a central teaching, 

‘The Hindu vtll r«member the opening word* of the Brthndaraif 
yeicp«nii)>4<l that the dawn ,i (a «cn5co ; tka Zorcorriui wUl recti! how 
Ahuri-Mtids: rar-.o forlh from an tel of »cri£ce : the Chriitlac will think of 
the Laiab— tbs lymbol of th* Lcgw— fclaln from the foundation ct the oc«td. 




96 



THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



and some of the profoundest truths of occultism are 
rooted in the law of sacrifice. 

An attempt to grasp, however feebly, the nature 
of the sacrifice of the Logos may prevent us from fall- 
ing into the very general mistake that sacrifice is an 
essentially painful thing ; whereas the very essence of 
sacrifice is a voluntary and glad pouring forth of life 
that others may share in it ; and pain only arises when 
there is discord in the nature of the sacrificer, between 
the higher whose joy is in giving and the lower whose 
satisfaction lies in grasping and in holding. It is that 
discord alone that introduces the element of pain, and 
in the supreme Perfection, in the Logos, no discord 
could arise ; the One is the perfect chord of Being, of 
infinite melodious concords, all tuned to a single note, 
in which Life and Wisdom and Bliss are blended into 
one keynote of Existence. 

The sacrifice of the Logos lay in His voluntarily 
circumscribing His infinite life in order that He might 
manifest. Symbolically, in the infinite ocean of light, 
with centre everywhere and with circumference nowhere, 
there arises a full-orbed sphere of living light, a Logos, 
and the surface of that sphere is His will to limit 
Himself that He may become manifest, His veil 1 in 
which He incloses Himself that within it a universe 
may take form. That for which the sacrifice is made 
is not yet in existence ; its future being lies in the 
“ thought " of the Logos alone ; to Him it owes its 

1 This is the Sell-tailing cower cl cfaa Logo?. Hi* Maya. the liraitioR ptioci- 
ple by which >11 form* are bangtil forth. Hie Ule apptan a* " Spirit." Hi* 
Miya a* " Matter.” »nil th**e are osvsr disjoined during manifratatioa. 




THE LAW OF SACRIFICE 



97 



conception and will owe its manifold life. Diversity 
could not arise in the “ partlcss Brahman ” save for 
this voluntary sacrifice of Deity taking on Himself form 
in order to emanate myriad forms, each dowered with 
a spark of His life and therefore with the power of 
evolving into His image. " The primal sacrifice that 
causes the birth of beings is named action (Karma)," 
it is said ; 1 and this coming forth into activity from 
the blis3 of the perfect repose of self-existence has ever 
been recognized as the sacrifice of the Logos. That 
sacrifice continues throughout the term of the universe, 
for the life of the Logos is the sole support of every 
separated “ lire," and He limits His life in each of the 
myriad forms to which He gives birth, bearing all the 
restraints and limitations implied in each form. From 
any one of these He could burst forth at any moment, 
the infinite Lord, filling the universe with His glory ; 
but only by sublime patience and slow and gradual 
expansion can each form be led upward until it be- 
comes a self-dependent centre of boundless power like 
Himself. Therefore does He cabin Himself* in forms, 
and bear all imperfections till perfection is attained, 
and His creature is like unto Himself and one with 
Him, but with its own thread of memory. Thus this 
pouring out of His life into forms is part of the original 
sacrifice, and has in it the bliss of the eternal Father 
sending forth His offspring as separated lives, that 
each may evolve an identity that shall never perish, 
and yield its own note blended with all others to swell 

1 Bhagavad Gila, vU. J. 




98 THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 

the eternal song of bliss, intelligence, and life. This 
marks the essential nature of sacrifice, whatever other 
elements may become mixed with the central idea ; it is 
the voluntary pouring out of life that others may par- 
take of it, to bring others into life and to sustain them 
in it till they become self-dependent, and this is but one 
expression of divine joy. There is always joy in the 
exercise of activity which is the expression of the power 
of the actor ; the bird takes joy in the outpouring of 
song, and quivers with the mere rapture of the singing ; 
the painter rejoices in the creation of his genius, in the 
putting into form of his idea ; the essential activity of 
divine life must lie in giving, for there is nothing higher 
than itself from which it can receive ; if it is to be 
active at all — and manifested life is active motion — 
it must pour itself out. Hence the sign of the 
spirit is giving, for spirit is the active divine life in 
every form. 

But the essential activity of matter, on the other 
hand, lies in receiving ; by receiving life-impulses it is 
organized into forms; by receiving them these are 
maintained; on their withdrawal they fall to pieces. 
All it3 activity is of this nature of receiving, and only 
by receiving can it endure as a form. Therefore is it 
always grasping, clinging, seeking to hold for its own ; 
the persistence of the form depends on its grasping 
and retentive power, and it will therefore seek to draw 
into itself all it can, and will grudge every fraction with 
which it parts. Its joy will be in seizing and holding; 
to it giving is like courting death. 




THR LAW OF SACRIFICE 



99 



It is very easy, from this standpoint, to see how 
the notion arose that sacrifice was suffering. While 
the divine life found its delight in exercising its activity 
of giving, and even when embodied in form cared not if 
the form perished by the giving, knowing it to be only 
its passing expression and the means of its separated 
growth ; the form which felt its life-forces pouring 
away from it cried out in anguish, and sought to 
exercise its activity in holding, thus resisting the out- 
ward flow. The sacrifice diminished the life-energies 
the form claimed as its own ; or even entirely drained 
them away, leaving the form to perish. In the lower 
world of form this was the only aspect of sacrifice 
cognizable, and the form found itself driven to the 
slaughter, and cried out in fear and agony. What 
wonder that men, blinded by form, identified sacrifice 
with the agonizing form instead of with the free life 
that gave itself, crying gladly : " Lo ! I come to do 
thy will, O God : 1 am content to do it." Nay, what 
wonder that men — conscious of a higher and a lower 
nature, and oft identifying their self-consciousness more 
with the lower than with the higher — felt the struggle 
of the lower nature, the form, as their own struggles, 
and felt that they were accepting suffering in resignation 
to a higher will, and regarded sacrifice as that devout 
and resigned acceptance of pain. Not until man identi- 
fies himself with the life instead of with the form can 
the element of pain in sacrifice be gotten rid of. In 
a perfectly harmonized entity, pain cannot be, for the 
form is then the perfect vehicle of the life, receiving or 




100 



THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



surrendering with ready accord. With the ceasing of 
struggle comes the ceasing of pain. For suffering 
arises from jar, from friction, from antagonistic move- 
ments, and where the whole nature works in perfect 
harmony the conditions that give rise to suffering are 
not present. 

The law of sacrifice being thus the law of life-evo- 
lution in the universe, we find every step in the ladder 
is accomplished by sacrifice — the life pouring itself out 
to take birth in a higher form, while the form that con- 
tained it perishes. Those who look only at the perish- 
ing forms see Nature as a vast charnel-house ; while 
those who see the deathless sonl escaping to take new 
and higher form hear ever the joyous song of birth 
from the upward-springing life. 

* * • • 

Those who grasp something of the wonderful 
possibilities which open out hefore us as we volun- 
tarily associate ourselves with the law of sacrifice, 
will wish to begin that voluntary association long ere 
they can rise to the heights just dimly sketched. 
Like other deep spiritual truths, it is eminently prac- 
tical in its application to daily life, and none who 
feel its beauty need hesitate to begin to work with 
it. When a man resolves to begin the practice of 
sacrifice, he will train himself to open every day with 
an act of sacrifice, the offering of himself, ere the day's 
work begins, to Him to whom he gives his life ; his 
first waking thought will be this dedication of all his 
power to his Lord. Then each thought, each word, 




THE LAV/ OF SACRIFICE 



101 



each action in daily life will be done as a sacrifice 
—not for its fruit, not even as duty, but as the way in 
which, at the moment, his Lord can be served. All 
that comes will he accepted as the expression of His 
will ; joys, troubles, anxieties, successes, failures, all to 
bim are welcome as marking out his pach of service ; 
he will take each happily as it comes and offer it as a 
sacrifice ; he will loose each happily as it goes, since 
its going shows that his Lord has no longer need for it. 
Any powers he has he gladly uses for service ; when 
they fail him, he takes their failure with happy equani- 
mity j since they arc no longer available he cannot give 
them. Even suffering that springs from past causes not 
yet exhausted can be changed into a voluntary sacrifice 
by welcoming it ; taking possession of it by willing it, a 
man may offer it as a gift, changing it by this motive 
into a spiritual force. Every human life offers count- 
less opportunities for this practice of the law of sacri- 
fice, and every human life becomes a power as these 
opportunities are seized and utilized. Without any 
expansion of his waking consciousness, a man may thus 
become a worker on the spiritual planes, liberating 
energy there which pours down into the lower worlds. 
His self-surrender here in the lower consciousness, 
imprisoned as it is in the body, calls out responsive 
thrills of life from the buddhic aspect of the Monad 
which is his true Self, and hastens the lime 
when that Monad shall become the spiritual Ego, 
self-moved and ruling all his vehicles, using each of 
them at will as needed for the work that is to be done. 




102 THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 

In no way can progress be made so rapidly, and the 
manifestation of all the powers latent in the Monad 
be brought about so quickly, as by the understanding 
and the practice of the law of sacrifice. Therefore was 
it called by a Master, "The law of evolution for 
the man." It has indeed profounder and more mystic 
aspects than any touched on here, but these will unveil 
themselves without words to the patient and loving 
heart whose life is all a sacrificial offering. There are 
things that are heard only in stillness ; there arc 
teachings that can be uttered only by " the Voice of 
the Silence." Among these arc the deeper truths rooted 
in the law of sacrifice. 




MANUSCRIPTS NOTES 



IV 

CHANDOVICITIVPTTI BY PETTAS'ASTRIN 
Bv Dr. C. Kunhan Raja 

This work is a very important one in tbe field of vedic exegesis. 
It is a commentary on the beginning of the Nidanasutras which 
have already been printed. The first section of the work deals 
with vedic prosody. There is a section dealing with the subject 
in the beginning of the Sarvinukramaijl of KSty&yana and at the 
end of the Rgvedaprhtis'Ekhya of S'aunaka. PettRrfistrin comments 
co the prosody section of the Nidtnasutras. There is a palm-leaf 
MS. of tbe work in the Adyar Library and it bears the shelf number 
34 A-1. There is a modem Devanigari transcript of it bearing 
the shelf number 38-H-17. Manuscripts of the work are available 
in other Libraries also. There is a copy in the Central Library 
at Baroda appearing as No. 47 in the Descriptive Catalogue, Vol. I. 
There is an original manuscript aDd there is also a transcript In 
that Library there is another commentary on tbe work called 
Tattvatmbcdhinl. This is quite another commentary whose author 
is not known. 

The real name of the author of the commentary is Hjslkes'a 
S’&strin. The work begins with a large number of Introductory 
verses in which the author gives details about himself. These 
verses are quoted in the Catalogue of the Barcda Library. Yet 
foe the sake of easy reference I quote them here. 

s’rlmnlasth&nasarvet/am afehilSotfet/varipciyam 
sadatanam aham vande sUfirBniau ca jarvadft 
2 




104 



THE ADVAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



pradhans&dtrakSradln mnnln drihySyapSdikfin 
ragSyanySiIikan samaiT&c&ryEn pi aijamft my abam 

yena kap$arainEQikyagiSinaratnanivasin3 
lartganaihfidlivariodreija makarxndabhidha kpft 

vyakhyfi hi padamaffjaryab kaumudyflb pOrpagabhidha 
irtrasa tun ah am van do mama raatamaham gurum 

yah %aj pirigalanagadyaib chacdovicitayab ktlaji 
tfisSm piSgalanSfilyfi sarvss&dh5rar)i bbavet 

sarvfinukrapl kftcic chando’nukiamapi para 
s’aunakiyfi tftlyemis tisra fgevdinEm matnb 

ySskona hi krta sa hi yajurvedavidftm matft 
samagfinam nidoaastha patafijalik[t8 hi sa 

vaidikEcSraniratavidsaddikaitamapdi te 
taHcEvOrahhidhagrEme ramye vSaam prakurvata 

satkaus'ikakulas'rimat prayigakutikena ca 
pradhanasutrapramukhaib ja^bhib sutraib saha sphujam 

adhilina sanravode sankhye tadbha^yavcdano 
pratipedayata phullasamniun parvapi parvapi 

s'rautasmartapravtpena narSyapasutena hi 
prak;lisamakajhipaparvaj0a[anakflriqa 

peitWalryabhidhSnena h^lkes'ena s’artnapd 
vjtlir nidanagachaDdovicilyuh kriyatctar&m 

prlyantam anaya vjtya samavedavi^Sradab 
yatheyam bhasatam lokc tathahglkriyat&S ca laib 

From this detailed remark it would be found that the author 
lived in Tanjore, that his father was Naruyapa, that his maternal 
grandfather was Raiifianitha who has written commentaries oa the 
PadamaHjart of Haradatta and on the Kaumudl. A copy of a 
small portion of the commentary on the Padamanjari called 
Makaranda is available in the Library ; it is also available else- 
where. I have not seen the commentary on the Kaumudl mention- 
ed here. This maternal grandfather of the author lived in the 
well-known village of Kap^aramapikya. He speaks of six works 




MANUSCRIPTS NOTES 



105 



on Vedic prosody namely (l) the work of Pidgak, (2) the Prosody 
portion ol the Sarvanukramaiji. (3) the Chaodo'mikramaol, (4) the 
work of Snunaka, (5) Tho work of Yaska nod (6) the prosody 
portion in the NidSnasutraa. Among them the first is a general 
wwk. Nos. (2) to (4) belong to the Bgveda. The fifth belongs to 
the Taittirlya Sakha and the sixth to the S&maveda. 

There i9 a Chando'nukraroaui and also an Arsinukramaoi publi- 
shed by Rajendra Lai Mitra in the Asiatic Society of Bengal Series 
as Appendix to the edition of the Bjhaddevata. These two are 
apoken of as works of S'aunka. To this Series belongs the work 
called the Devarttnukramapl whose Manuscript (incomplete) is 
available in the Government Oriental Manuscripts Library, Madras 
along with tho Chando'nukranuuji (No. R 4169). It is 
absolutely certain that those Anukramaijla are not the works of 
Saunaka. Segura in his commentary* on the SarvSnukiupl quotes 
from the Annkramatjls of Saunaka and none of these passages are 
found in these Anukramaijl*. Here, Pettfts&Btrin also speaks of 
the Chando’nukramaijl as different from the work of Saunaka. 
Perhaps PetUs'Jstrin must have meant this Chando'unkrama®l 
published in the Asiatic Society of Bengal, as the one which is 
different from the work of S'aunaka. The work of Yaska (No. 3.) 
is also unknown. The existence of such a work is known only 
from this reference. Further down in this work there are various 
places where the author speaks of the Sarvanukramap! of the 
Tattirlyasaiphita by Yaska. If Yiska wrote a S'arvtaukrapl, the 
question arises why he wrote a separate Anukramaijl for Chandas. 
Perhaps he has written Anukramaflls for the other subjects also 
like flgi and DevaUL 

At the end of the work the stanzas from vaidikieftranirata up 
to knyatetarim are repeated. The work contains about two 
thousand and four hundred Granthas. The commentary is very 
elaborate. There are profuse quotation from a large number of 
works. All the works from which the author quotes aro fairly 
well-known works. But there are two works which are not at all 




106 



THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



known, except from this commentary. One is the Chando'nu- 
kramagi for the TaittiriyasanibitS by Yfiska and the other is the 
SaTvSnukramao! for the Tmttiriyasanihita;. I have already written 
a Paper on the S'arv&nukramagl of the Taittirlyasamhiti by Yaska, 
prepared for the Session of the International Congress of Orientalists 
held at Leyden and included in the Agenda of the Session and 
later publishod in the Journal of Oriental Research, Madras, 
VoL V, pp. 215 ft 

The Brbaddevatft quotes the opinion of Yaska on various points. 
The opinions do not agree with what Y&ska says in the Nirukta when 
such opinions are traceable to the Nirukta. From the mention of the 
S p arvSnukraroat)t ot the Tfclttixtyas&iphitfi by Yfiska, we may assume 
that the references in the Bthaddevati are to this work of Yaska. It 
has also to be assumed that the two Yiskaft (the authors of the N irukta 
and the Anukramapls) arc not identical. Since PettiAstrin 
mentions the Chando’nukramaol of the Taittiriyasaqihita by Yaska, 
it is also possible that Yfiska has written Anukrama^Is on other 
points on which Anukrama&ls are usually written for saqihitas, 
like Psi and Devati. But these are only assumptions which may 
serve os guide for those who are in search, of Manuscripts. No 
theories regarding authors and works can be built on such evidences- 

Pettos'astrin is a fairly recent writer. He must have livod 
after Sftyatja. He even mentions S&ya$a. He says: firseya- 
brfihmaOabhgJjyakSravidyaraoyenApy uktam. There are other 
places also where the name of SSyajja is mentioned. TUI very* 
recent times, the study of the Vedas with all the Aflgas in an 
intelligent way, examination and scrutiny of works on Vedic 
Literature and writing of new interpretations were quite common. 
There was no break in the tradition of Vedic studies even at 
such a late date. There is reason to txdieve that such a con- 
tinuity of the tradition cxistod only in certain villages and certain 
families. 

Apart from the six works mentioned by PettaYIstrin where 
vedic prosody is dealt with, there are two more works dealing with 




MANUSCRIPTS NOTES 107 

the subject. One is in the K&rikSs which M&dbava son cl 
Vedkajaiy* prefixes to his commentary on the (igveda for the various 
Adbyftyas. The Chanda* is dealt with in the sixth A&Jaka (or the 
eight Adhylyas. There is another Mldhavw who has written 
twelve Anukrair.anls for the l<gveda. ChnDdas is one of them. 
The place where these Mudhavas livod cannot he far away from 
where Pettas'flstrin lived, nlthough they must have been separated 
from PetiSs'Qstrin by seven or eight centuries. Yet it is surprising 
that there is not a mention of either of the Midha vas by PettSs’ls- 
trin in the work. It cannot be that the works of the MSdhavas had 
been forgotten and were not current in his time in South India. In 
Malalor these commentaries must have been current and Manu- 
scripts of the commentary of Mildhava son of Verilojarya were 
acquired from Malabar. But in the case of the other Mildhava the 
Manuscript was found in the Tamil Districts, Since the two 
Madhavas depended upon Snunaka for their material, Pettas'ftstrin 
perhaps did not care for these later works ; and where there were 
interesting points in them, they related to the pgveda and did not 
interest Pettfitffistria who war- dealing with the Sftmaveda. 

V 

THE ASVALAYANA GpHYA SCTRA BHA$YA 
OF DEVASVAMIN 

[Malabar Recension) 

I em editing the commentary’ of DevasvSmin cn the As’va- 
lSyana Grhya Sutras in this Bulletin. Till now a small portion 
has been published. For the purpose of this edition 1 had been 
looking for manuscripts of this week. There is an old Paper 
manuscript of the work in the Adyar Library itself, which is the 
main basis for the edition. I was able to have the manuscript of 
the D, A- V. College Library, Lahore, which was very kindly 




108 



THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



placed at my disposal by the authorities of that college for some 
time. I have also been able to secure a transcript of the manuscript 
of the work in the Library of the Sanskrit College in Calcutta. 
There is a manuscript of the work in Trivandrum and I was sup- 
plied with a transcript of it after I began the edition of the work. 
When 1 received the transcript anil when I compared it with the 
manuscripts I had already with me. I found that the Trivandrum 
manuscript represents a recension which is very different from the 
recension represented by the North Indian manuscript*. The 
manuscript in the Adyar Library is also a North Indian one, having 
been secured from Benares. 

The variation* in readings found in the Trivandrum manus- 
cripts arc so many and so stoking that it is not possible to give 
them as foot-notes. So I have decided to give this recension as 
an appendix a! the end of the work. Meanwhile I take this oppor- 
tunity to give a full description of the manuscript so that scholars 
may know of such a recension also. In giving the descriptions, 
I give the page number* according to the transcript in the Adyar 
Library. It bears the shelf number XXXVIII-E-9. It covers 
331 pages with an average of 7 grtntha par page. 

The work begins ; Srib- 

namaskttya saras vatyai gurubhvay caiva aarvaVab 
gaunakan tu vis'esega pratjamya prayatab s’ucib 

arthavismarafl&rthan tu kiftcid vaksyarm . . . 

ti§yc yatblsrnrtun 

gjhyapSm y&ni sfltr&si tesin c&dau yathar.tatah 
grahapam vaksyate yat tu tad ctat stitram ucyate. 
uktani vaitamkani. gfbyij>l vak§yamab 
tatrodam pratijitasutram. uttaratrsisya vidbir vistarepn vak$yate. 

It would be noticed from my edition ot the work in this Bulletin 
that according to the North Indian recension, there are no verses in 
the beginning. The commentary begins : nktftni vyikhyitani 
kathitini. Then when the commentary' proper begins the varia- 
tions are considerable. Since I have already published portions of 




MANUSCRIPTS NOTES 



109 



the commentary in the North Indian recension in thin Bulletin, I 
am not reproducing the passancs here for comparison. Tlic readers 
ire requested to look into the portions already printed in die issues 
of this Bulletin. 

The Malabar recension represented by tbe Trivandrum m an li- 
ter, pt (which I will designate the M. recension ; and the North 
Indian recension I will designate die N. 1. recension) starts with die 
meaning of the word grhya unlike the N. 1. recension. The 
starting portion in M. recension is as follows: gshygjtiii. g(hc 
bfcsvini yini karmB^i tftni Rfhysui. tatrayam grhas'abdah trigv 
arthegu vartato yatha tfivat blifiryfiyaiu rfalayftm fts'rair.c iti. tatra 
r’iliyfln tflvat kva devadalla ity ukte Gfi'e iti. devadattasya ete 
gfha drs'yante iti ca. yatha as’ramc. catvtra fis’ratnab. lesim 
grhastho yonir iti. giahslhn ity ukte gfhe yas tisthati sa piattyate 
yadi {?). kas tarhi. Ss'ramc yo blmvnti sa pratlyate. yatha bharySyam. 
sagibo ‘ yam agatnb iti bruvati pratlyate bliaryayS saha Sgata iti. 
nasau s'aladibhib &aha Sgacchali iti. kasmSt ai/aUyatvfit. teas 
gtl-.yltam karmaoSm pravf ttir bhirySsamyogad bhavatiti grhas'afcdo 
bhftryayfim drasjavyab- kim karatJaiti.yasmSt tatsaipyogfid “tpalino 
’ gnau imSm karmiiji pmvarunto. yegam punar dayadyfidir agnib 
pravartate te&Sm grWatxiab s'tlSsu bhavati. pp. 1 and 2 

It is after this that we have the portion found in ihe N. I. re- 
cension, namely, uktani vanjilSni. This is the beginning of the 
commentary in tbe N. I. recension. Even in this portion which is 
common to both the recensions, the weeding* are very different. 
The following passage from the M. recension may be compared with 
tbe corresponding portion in the N. I. recensico : uktani vart)it«ni. 
kathilini ity arthab- uktanam punar uktatvakathane kim prayo- 
janam. prakrtir egft Rcaryasya anyatrapy uttaravivaisaya uktasySr- 
thasya punar anuklitanam karoti. Doty ucyate. sarvatra prayojaoim 
ucyate- yasmfit tato ’pi prayojacam vaktavyam. idan tu prayojamm. 
s^istrasainbandhakaraiy&rthata. rtatrasambandhakanMjSt prayo janam 
s'rautfinSm sroiitfinam ca tulyapradare'anartbam. naitad asti pra- 
yo janam. upadei'Sd eva tulyatvam bbavati. katharo. ekakartikatvail 




110 



THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



ubhaye^Sm katraaoSni. s'raulaDSm smRrt&nam ca tuly&b kar- 
tfirab, evam tarhi uklinSra vaitficikasamiBS yatbfi. tad api oa 
pray-Djanam. anyatra kita saipjOS. agnyadbeyaprabhrtloy aha vaita- 
nikSni iti, adau IqtS samjni kjtciarn uparuoaddki cet a yam xhaiu 
dojab. grhy&oftm vaitlnikasarojta prapnoti. ekai/iatratviL tannivr- 
tyartham vacanara arabhyatc. as tu. ko do§ab* agnyadheyad uttaia- 
kalam pcavrttir grhyflfl&m kannaoam api prSpnoti. tac ca nc^yatc. 
tannivpyartham vacanam Rrabbyate. na prayojanam. kasmfit. 
i'astiftntaratvit grhyiUjfini vailanikasatpjSS oa hhavati. katham 
Urhi s'flstrantaralvam. iha adhynyapan :;amiptau vSkyasya vakyai- 
kaderfasya v& traya^am vikyinftm abhyasab krtab- S’&strapar.sa. 
maptau tu ScfiryebbyaS 1 ca namaskSra upadtfyate. tasmat s’Sstran- 
taram idam. sfistrftntare ca adbikRro nivartatc. s'fistrantaratvtu. 
satyam. idam tu prayojanara. katham sautryab paribbR^Sb pr5p- 
nuyur iti. yatha tasya rntyflb piificas' ce$tSb ityavamSdytt. asti 
prayojanam. do$o ‘pv asti. avasthitasya kaimiiji prgpnuvanti. evam 
taihi sakpi roantreija iti vacanam aparthakam. again) Ue purohitam 
ity eka ity ckagtahaham apfirthakam. yathu yajfiopavity ucamya iti 
yajncpavlugrahagam apfirthakam. yajfiopovitl iti aati anekadopipta- 
sarigab- astu. na hy Smayabhay&d bbojanan utsjjyatc. pratighato 
yatoah kartavyab- ovara ihapi. guoSrtbab sambandhab- do§an pariba- 
risyfimab- tena latra yad uktam avasthitasya karmHoi prapauvanti 
iti. na bhavisyanti. hutvR Lillian pratyaflmukhab prg;\mukhya 
SslnSyab iti ti^|bangrahaijani kurvan etarr. aitliam darVayau. 
anyatra karma Sslnasya bhavati iti. anyathS hi praiyanir.ukhataiva 
vidhfitavyj sySt. yatra cisya titfhato homo ’bhipretab fyit tatra 
yatnam karoti yathi ti$;han samidham adadhyat iti. tona yad 
avocflma sambandhartham vacanam iti tad yuktam. at ha kfini 
punar grhyfioi karmatyi iti katham jfiayato. agjiyadhcyadtn3m 
karmatvat tala' ca sambandhit grhyadtnam api karmatvam. napuips- 
akabhidhanac ca. tastmat pian$;hitam. pp. 2-4 

This is the commentary’ on the first Sutra. By comparison 
with what is printed in this Bulletin, one can see what a difieieace 
there is between the two recensions. This is not an isolated instance 




MANUSCRIPTS NOTES 



111 



deliberately selected. Such variations are noticeable in other places 
also I give another long quotation from the M. recension for a 
portion that is appearing in this Bulletin. This is the commen- 
tary 0:1 ihe SOtro : apracchinnigrftv njiantargarbbau prfcdetfamatiaii 
kusfou nfin&ntayor g[hUv&fiRu§lhopnlcani§thikabhyam savitus Jva 
prasava utpunfimy accbidrepa ptivitrotya vasob suryasya r&sfaibhir 
iti prag utpunfiti sakpn mantrega dvis tUsolm. This is the 3rd 
St! era in the third khap^a of the first chapter. The commentary 
according to the M. recension is as follows : acchinnagrSv iti 
vaktavye pras'abdo na vaktavyah. kasmlL pras’alxlab prakirsav&ci. 
6tikgtnachinn5grau katham gihyeyfttfim iti. anyathi hi noivam 
labhyeyStSm. ta&mat pias r abdttb kai tavyafe. anantnrgarbhau. antar 
yayor gaxbhau na stab Ulv imlv anantargarbhav ity ucyete. 
priMcs’amStriv iti parim&oavaamab. kus'&v iti dravyonirdrrfab* 
tau kus'iv evaqdak$W)aUe uSJi&ntayor gjhitva. ninfigrahapam 
pphaggnihapartham. athavfi agflrph ?»3f«hflm syaL aiambaddhav ity 
aktam bhavati. upapadyate cEyam arthab- kaaniSl. nEnfiyabdasya 
Pfthsgvftcitvit. arigusthopakasiia$hikfibhyfim grahaoam bhavati. 
talrcjiakanisjhikeli k.iuis(kikSyS ananlanun yS vartate scpakanifl Li- 
kely ucyate. lokapratiiddhE ca. utt&nabhyam pEotbbyfim iti 
niyamab. savituf Jva ity anena mantrega. prld utpunati iti vyEkhya- 
oakOe pfijhah kartavyab. prig utpunEli ity etaamiu pSJhe luutuh 
piErtraukhatvnprfiptih. tac cEmsjnia syfit. kaamEt. vihitatvlt tasya 
nitya iti. tau kriyiyib praktvaiti vidhlyate. nanu caitad api 
siddhom. b&tfham siddham. iha s'EstrEntarc pratyak ca vacanam 
dRjam pratyad ca. tan nivityarthara vySkhyftnakUlo tv aysm pEJho 
oyftyyab* evam gate y« tv anyas’istraeata vidhayo ’virodbinab 
tejarr. aplhecchitah kriya siddhE. tasmflt prW ntpunltJty 
ayam pSjhab kriyate. ttarvatraivam karmavrttau iti siddhe nak(n 
mantretja Iti kimartham firabhyatc. trigrahage aati sa paribhfisS 
bhavati. iha ca tiigrabagam nAsti. evafi cet txigrahagain evEstu. 
prftn ulpunati tub iti. evam siddhe axti >ad firabhyata tasya pra- 
yojanam ucyate. katham. evam pwibbSsS iha katham na syit id. 
tatra kim siddham. yEvat karirAbhyEso vartate tftvan mantra yatha 




112 



THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



syfid Hi. kim udBharaoam. pradiik$it>am s'iras rrir undati. tatbfi 
jrij tejasB mSsam ana j mi iti ca. kimaHham punar yoga firabhyate. 
adhikSrartham. adhikrtasyijyasyaivotpavanam katham sy£d iti. 
yady evam ilcivajyagiahaoam astu na prSg Bjyam utpunStiti. evam 
npi pavitraitham avasfyam firabdhavyam. tayob aanijBS kriyate. 
katham anayob kus'ayob pavitram ity esa sarpjBa syad it). samjSB- 
yfib kim prayojanam. caturaa 1 caturo m nit in nirvapati pavitre 
antardhfiya iti daksiljottare patji aandhfiya pavitravantlv ity evam 
pavitrai/abda ihaiva kartavyab. prirWamBtre kua'e pavitre iti. evam 
sati dvix utpavanakriyB ccxlitS bhavati. evam siddhe yat pithagyogab 
kriyate tad dvaivklhyam darfl’ayati. evam sati kim siddham bhavati. 
vikalpab- kim sarvatru. na ity ucyate. nivisjavisayiv etau vidbl 
maatavyau. tatia yo ‘yam saroantrako vidhib sab prakarape 
krtfirtho bhavati. kasmBL parisamBptyai!hatv5t. paryBptadhaimas' 
ca vidhib prakaraoa eva bhavati. a than yat prakaraoSntare vidhiyate 
navanitasyotpavanam vidhiyate tatra catur grhitam Bjyam juhnyflt 
ityevamSdisu. tasrr.Bd etat prayojanam pphagyogena. pp. 27-31 
But there are places where the two recensions are not so 
different. I give an example. There 19 the SOtra : te$fim purast&c 
catasra BjyBhutir juhuyfit, which is the 3rd Satra in the 4th KhatjiJa 
of the first chapter. The commentary on this in the Mi recension 
is as follows : cauJadinSm grahapam svayam eva bliavisyati. tesBm 
evudhikBrab. tasmBt tesfim iti na vaktavyam. anantaro vivSho ’dhikr- 
tab- tannivrtyaitliara tesBm ity ucyate. tan nopapadyate. dais'ayisyat- 
yathfi s&rvesBm evaitB Bhutayo bhavantiti. vivBhe caturthimiti viviha. 
grahaQam karoti. tena sarvatraitB Bhutayo bhavantiti siddham, 
tesBm iti na vaktavyam. tatraike tesBm purastad iti purastad 
dhcmfi ete bhavantiti. evam sampratipannBb prficyab* yady evam 
tesamgrahaoam apBrthakam eva. purastad ity eva purastad dliomab 
siddhab- apcre ahub. tesBm purastBddhosnanivrtyartham. tejBm 
eva caulakarmidinBm eta Bhutayo bhavantiti. na purastSd bhavan- 
lit, etasminn evirthe. puraatBdgrahaoam apSrlbakam. nSpBrlhakam. 
prayojanam uttaratra vak?yBmab. tatra catasra ajyfihutir iti 
catas;grahaijam apBrthakam. catasra evaitB bhavantiti. pp. 44, 45. 




MANUSCRIPTS NOTES 



113 



Here it would be found that except for the last portion, the 
two recension? agree to a large extent. The differences are only 
due to scribal errors and such causes. The M. recension stops 
abruptly, with the remark : prayojanam uttamtra vak%yflmab. Bui 
tbs N. I recension continues. 

There is no doubt on the point tluxt the work is by DevasvKrain. 
The colophons arc very definite on tho point. Tbs colophons are : 
prathame caturviqi<atitani& kaodika. iti devasv5mikrte Ss'valayana- 
g[hyabha$ye prnthamo' dhylynb (Page 218). iti dvitlye das’aml 
ka&dika. iti devasvamiviracitc a?’ val&yanagrhyabh Ssy e dvitlyo 'dhyfi- 
yat> samaptab (Page 287). Tlio manuscript ends on Page 331 
with the colophon : Iti trtiye nsjainl ka^ika. 

The question anses how tho same work could have been 
preserved in two parts o: India in such divergent recensions. We 
know of shorter recensions and longer recensions. Wo know of 
occasional interpolations. We know of occasional abbreviations. 
But this case is quite different from all the above ways of variations 
in recensions in works tliat we know of. The various recensions 
of works like the Mahabhamta and die Rftmly&oa are well known. 
We know of Kftlidisa’s S'fikuctala and Meghamndes'a in different 
recensions, some recensions having n large number of additional 
passages. The Vakyapadlya of Bhartfhari, including both the 
KSiikis and his own vjtti, is available in a shorter recension, 
having boen published in the Benares Sanskrit Series and In a 
longer recension in Manuscripts in Madras (See S- Krijhnaswami 
Aiyargar Commemoration Volume, Madras, 1936- Page 287, 
Note 13). 

Another form in which different recensions of the same 
work can be handed down is what is represented by the C&rudatta 
published in the Trivandrum Sankrit Series as a work of Bhfisa, 
which is only a stage adaptation of the Mrcchakajika of S'Edraka 
by some Malabar actors. But tho position in the case of the two 
recensions of the commentary of DevasvSmin is quite different. 
The only parallel that I have been able to find for such a difference 




114 



THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



is the case o ( the two recensions of the {tgvedabbl$yfc by Skandas- 
v&rain. One recension has been published for the first two 
adhyfiyas of the first astaka in the Trivandrum Sankrit Scries and 
the remainder of the recension for the first asjaka I have published 
in the Madras University Sanskrit Series. The commentary must 
have existed in another recension. Only the first two chapters of 
this recension are available in a single palm -leaf copy and this 
portion of the rcccos;on is also published in the same volume in 
the Madras University Sanskrit Series. 1 am not bold enough to 
postulate a theory or to suggest an explanation for the existence 
of two such recensions for the same work. 1 content myself with 
giving out facts. 



SOME STOTRA MSS. 

By V. Raghavan, M.A., I’H.D. 

On p. 2076 of pan I, the Adyar Catalogue mentions a 
VySsapulr5staks (28 M 51). This is the well known SubRspaka, 
eight verses in MacdSkianta, on tbo AvadhGta state, with the 
refrain « fafa: €l I As such, it should be 

brought together with the four S'ukSsjaka MSS. on p. 208a. 

On p. 2JQa, ibid., we find 14 MSS. of a Candras’ekbars^taka, 
against only one of which a mentioned MSrkaijdeya as the author. 
On pp. 239 b and 240a, there 16 MSS. ol a MSrkai>$eya k;ta 
Sivas'.otra. These two entries must be brought together, for the 
two are identical. Marlcagdeya is said to be the author of these 
eight Verses on S'iva beginning with WfflJflKlWW and ending with 
the refrain ft ♦R^fd 5 OTJ I 

Kules'varapagflya stuti by Kules'vara, 28 M 51, p. 189a. Ad. 
Cat. I. — This is a hymn on Sundares'vara at Madura, spoken by 
King Kulejvarapiijtfya of Madura. RSjas'ekharapSi^ya stuti by 




SOME STOTRA MSS. 



115 



Rlja^ckhatapaij^ya, 28 M 51, p. 193a ibid .— This also is a stotra 
oo SundareeVara spoken by RSjaa'ckharapai^ya. Kuadodsra 
ituli, 22 F 32 and 28 M 51, p. 227a— This is also a hymn on 
SuadaretfVara and Kupdodara is the spanker here. F. 19+5. 28 M 
51 VidySvatl stuti by Vidy.ivati and p. 2445, 22 F 32, Vidyavati 
stotra— These two aro identical ; this is a hymn on Goddess Mtnfike: 
at Madura spoken by Vidyivatl. The speakers of all these four 
are characters in the HttlBsyaraahatmya on tha shrine at Madura 
and these Stotras themselves seem to form pert of the Hillsya- 
rndhatmya. The Saur.darap&odya stuti by Sundarapiij^ya on p, 197a 
{28 M 51) is another Stotra on Sundae as 1 ’ vara, spoken by King 
Sun data p*ody* and belongs to the same source as the above four. 
The MS. itsolf calls this Stotra Aparadhak^amfipanttsfaka. 

P. 218a, 28, M 51 Vighnos'vRra a^jottara s'atanimastotra : 
According to the colophon, this is from the 7th Amsfe of the 
Sivarahasya. 

R&mamattebha, anou, 28 M 51, p. 20Sa: This stotra begins 
with the words : I Mattebha seetns to be the 

name of the metre employod. According to the last veise, the 
author of this Stotra on RSma is one Vlahadevakavi, 

Paradevata stotra, Cat. I, 2366, 28 M 51 The MS. says 
that this Stotra is from the 7th Ams'a of the S'ivorahasya. 

MahiranabplthikS, ibid . p. 239a, 28 M 51:— This MS. con- 
sists of verses prefatory to the SW Mahimnasstava, ascribed to 
Pu^padanta. 

On p. 2006 of the Catalogue, Part I, there is a JambunSthll- 
({aka (28 M 51) entered undor the heading 1 anonymous Stotras.’ 
This is a Stotra by the well-known S’rkihara Veiikajcsa, referred 
to as ArzSviL 

The Adyar MS. 28 M 51 contains sixty-four minor works, 
mostly Stotras. The information regarding the contents given on 
the tickets tied to this MS. is not correct in some cases. No. 3 in 
this is mentioned on the ticket as ‘ Rirna Daq jak a ’ and is so 
entered on p. 205a of Part I of (be Catalogue. We, however, find 




116 



THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



here in the MS a Stotra called ' RttmapaBcaratna prStassmaraqa 
slolTa.’ No. ♦ in this MS i9 a list of Names of the Mother, 
called DcvlpijhanSraSni, covering: one leaf ; but this titlo is missing 
in the Catalogue. No 16 is a Naferfa^aka in one leaf 

ftwwifo q HR etc.) aDd this also is not trace* bio in 
the Catalogue. Similarly. No. 12 here, a Siva stotra, is missing 
in the CaUik«ue. 

T1IE BHA1RAVA STOTRA OF ABH1NAVAGUPTA 

On p. 1R86 of the Adyar Catalogue, Part I, there is mentioned 
an In’ vara stotra by Abhmavagupta (9 B 82) and on p. 192a, ibid^ 
a Bhairava stotra (9 B 16a) by the same writer. These are not 
two different hymns of Abhinava, but refer to the same hymn on 
Bhairava, as an examination of the manuscripts shows. The correct 
name is Bhairava stotra ; for Bhairava is the deity-name occurring 
in the text and a manuscript of it in the Bibliothejue Nationals, 
Paris, gives its name as Bhairava stotra- This Stotra is of interest, 
bearing as it does the date of its composition and 1 propose to notice 
it more fully in a further issue of thi* Journal. 




REVIEWS 

Gorakhnath and Mtdiatval Hindu Hyiticim, by Dr. Mohan 
Singh, M.A., Ph.D., D. Litt Published by tbe author— Lahore. 
Pages xxii, 150. Crown 8vo— Price Rs. 25. 

Gorakhnath bslongB to that group of Saints and Mystics whose 
life and teachings bad, and still have a univenal apfaal trans- 
cending ail barriers of Race, Caste or Creed. In the words of Sir 
Fronds Younghusband (who contributes ooo of the Forewords to 
this work), he was “ a man of great force, downright and stern, and 
of that sure touch for the inwardness of thing* which makes men of 
very varying 1 orthodoxies ’ claim him as odc of their leaders." 
Though varying orthodoxies including M&hSyana Buddhism have 
claimed him, the, author's view seems to be that he belonged to 
the Nath or Yogi (Jogi) ordor and tho best exponent of Kanphata 
Jcgi Sect, though not its founder. The author also claims that 
" Gorakh is tho first historical figure of Medieval Hindu Mysticism 
and Medieval Vernacular Literature." This claim seems to us 
unsustainable ; and we think tbe author himself would change his 
view if he becomes belter acquainted with tho Life of the Siddhas 
and Alvars of tho Tamil- land (to whom a casual reference is made) 
and with the extensive sacred literature written in Tamil, the 
vernacular in which their devotional outpourings and mystic 
teachings were given to the world. To say that, prior to Gorakhnath, 
there were Naths or Siddhas in the South— and historical figures too 
—is, of course, not to belittle, in the very least, die great importance 
of the School of Gorakhnath and his contemporary and teacher 
Matsyeadra or to yield to any one in offering our homage and 




118 



THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



adoration to this great Siddha cr AvadhQta. The most valuable part 
of the book is the publication of the text (with translation) from 
the manuscript of Gorakh-Bodha, a work where the essentials of 
the teaching of Gocakh are given in the form of questions and 
answers between Gorakh and Matsycndra. Here the students of 
the Upani$ads and the sacred collections of Tamil Saints — 
both f?aivite and Vai^jjavito — anil find striking parallelisms. 
Valuable too are tho publications of tho Hindi Texts of the 
teachings of Gorakh and certain Mystics of his order aod of 
certain passages from the Upanisada and Yogic works for the 
purpose of showing doctrinal affinities. For ail this, we beg to 
tender out grateful thanks to the learned author. 

Wc cannot, however, close this review without making mention 
of the fact that, while the English translation of Texts is good, 
the editing of the original Texts themselves leaves much to be 
desired — specially in the Samsktt portion. It is to be hoped that 
competent and critical editing of Texts will be undertaken in the 
next edition, the need for which, wo hope, will bo felt before long, 
having regard to the fact that the number of copies stated to have 
been printed now is only 250. This will perhaps explain the fact 
that the price of this comparatively small book of only 172 crown 
octavo pages is fixed at the phenomenal figure of Rs. 25 a copy. 

G. S. M. 



Creative Morality, by L. A. Reid, D. Litt., Professor of 
Mental and Moral Philosophy, University of Durham, London, 
Gecege Allan and Unwin, 1937 ; Pp. 270 ; price lCsh. 6d. net. 

To the question " Why should I think consistently ? " only one 
answer is intelligible — that otherwise I shall be not thinking at 
all, but committing intellectual suicide. To the question " Why 
should 1 do the right ? " the answer does not seem to be equally simple. 
Moral philosophers have tended to stress either the consequences, 
thus reducing the ought to a hypothetical imperative, or the bare 




REVIEWS 



119 



rightness of the act reducing it to contentlew formalism. No 
thorough-gome moralist can afford to see tlie right dissolved into 
a calculus of consequence* ; but a right divorced from the good 
ajually dissolves into thin air and disappears. While recognizing 
the paramouutcy of practical reason, which, no lera than the 
theoretical, will not brook contradiction, the moral philosopher 
has also to note that morality is not empty solf-consistency but a 
creative coherence expressivo of the good. The good ia not a 
beneficial end to bo achieved by morality as the means ; rather is 
it a system that socks creative expression through morality ; the 
former is narrow and calculating ; the latter is free and spontane- 
ous. The truly moral man is comparable not to the successful 
economist weighing ends and means, but the great sportsman and 
great artist who joyfully and freely express themselves and through 
themselves the ideal* of health and beauty that inspire them. Thus 
we may avoid both the Scylb of utilitarianism and the Charybdis 
of Kantian or dcontological formalism. 

Dr. Reid's presentation is fresh, vigorous and charming, 
and his point of viow definitely marks an advance on current 
notions of morality. Tire book constitutes a very valuable study 
erf the moral life, at once stimulating and illuminating. His view 
avoid* net only the formalism but al*o the pluralism of duty by 
integrating duties in a system dominated by love or Agape, which, 
as be says, is not mere emotion, but "a whole state of mind, 
cognitive, conative and affective, which is the outcome of a 
Kotiment built into character" (p. 142). Hence religion is more 
stable and basic than " morality tinged with emotion." “ The 
ioBigbt of religious love gives strength; insight :s more funda- 
mental than effort " (p. 243). “ Conduct cannot be deeply expressive 
of gcod unless vision is so ” (p- 252). 

Dr. Reid, who is the author of A Study in Aetthetia as 
well, is fully alive to the parallel of art as creative, There is a 
rule-of-thumb morality just as there is a rule-of-thumb art ; but 
really expressive art rises far above this stage, and so does creative 
4 




120 



THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



morality. Our author see*, however, a limitation to the parallelism. 
The M work of art is itself a sufficient and complete individual and 
is good as a whole ", while in the moral life 44 every situation is 
a part of a context both subjective and objective M (p. 96). Such a 
proposition can claim only £ri»i<r facie truth. No expression of 
beauty can claim perfection in so far as it is fragmentary. Even 
pornography is an art, not because of abstraction from the context, 
but ia spite of the abstraction. Where beauty find* expression in 
such a form that oven the urge and ideals of pornography are 
included and transformed, such expression is bound to be more 
significant and so far forth superior art. In the moral life too, 
actions have to be judged in relative abstraction. A thief may be a 
kind husband and a good father ; the kindness and goodness cannot 
but secure approbation, though to the man as a whole we may mete 
out punishment, a punishment, however, which will never be on a 
par with that earned by an unredeemed reprobate. Neither in art 
nor in morality can a valid judgment t* arrived at without a 
vision of Beauty or the Good as a whole ; this, however, is not 
inconsistent with the fact of partial judgment* in both spheres, 
consequent on our finilude. Dr. Reid who strives valiantly for a 
monism of moral value, does not go forward to the further monism 
of all value, truth, beauty and goodness being three phases thereof, 
not three independent existent* or subsystems. In such a view, the 
parallelism between art and morality will appear greater than 
Dr. Reid is prepared to grant. 

A fully thought-out monism, again, would have guarded our 
author from a lap«c which occurs in the refusal to identify good- 
ness with whar ought-to-be. It is true that ought-to-bc implies the 
tension of oughtdo-do and such tension is inconsistent with the 
existsne* of value. What kind of existence is claimed for good- 
ness ? Not actual or present existence as then there can be no 
striving for it. Nor may it be claimed that goodness is actual while 
what is good is only possible ; for there is i>o goodness in abstraction 
from what is good. If all that goodness can claim is possible 




REVIEWS 



121 



existence, (thus is all that seems lo follow from the quotation on 
p. 148 from Sorlcy). there is no inconsistency between possible 
existence and the tension of the ought- to-be. A through-going 
menial would say that value is real, not ev ‘start; and there is no 
irreconcilability between reality and tension. 

S. S. Slryanarayanan 



Practical Lessons in Yoga (Yogic Culture Series No. 1), by 
Swami Sivananda Saraswati. Rikhikesh, Himalayas. Published 
by Mod Lai Bar.arasl Das, Saidmitka Street, Lahore. Pp. xlii, 
363, 1938. Price not stated. 

Swami Sivananda widely known a3 a prolific writer on Yoga 
and the philosophy of the Upani$ad.s has now come forward with 
the book under review. Ho gives a rapid summary of the subject- 
matter of the book in the author’s Preface. " This book has been 
specially designed by the author keeping in mind the needs of the 
students in Yoga in Europe and America." In the course of tbeir 
wanderings in India as tourists they do cot find it possible to stay 
for long periods of time to study the subject from adept*. Nor 
are they always lucky enough to find the right kind oi teacher. 
In order that the students in the west might get the full benefit 
of a teacher properly trained in the art of Ycga and yogic dis- 
cipline and at the same time make them understand the full 
significance of such knowledge and training— and not be carried 
away by bits of information alone which they might have heard 
or assimilated during the course of their tours in India — the author 
has come forward with a first bock, giving practical lessons to 
ascend the yogic scale, to all practical aspirants. 

The book is written in a simple, lucid, direct and clear style. 
The author has frankly given his personal convictions and experiences 
in a convincing manner and even a disbeliever in Yoga and the 
practices of Yoga would be convinced of the truth about it. The 




122 



THE ADYAK LIBRARY BULLETIN 



illustrations of the various tlsmurs are not unreal. And the spiritual 
power which they lead to are conditioned by the mental attitude of the 
aspirant. The object of Yoga is to weaken the five afflictions (p. 4) 
ns Ignorance, Likes and Dislikes, Egoism and the instinct of self- 
preservation. Concentration on God and absorption in that one 
thought alone will lead the person to the proper goal (p. 9). 

Speaking of the Yogic Sadhana, the author discusses the 
various kinds of yoga and points out that they all lead to the same 
goal, namely, self- realization ; they are only different paihs, each 
suited to the particular individual according to his development. 

Dealing with the discipline that the would be-yogin, the eight- 
fold path and each one of these items are dealt with. The import- 
ance of celibacy is clearly shown and the practise of patience and 
frequent exercise of eontiol over the Mind are brought out to the 
full. These two aspects cannot bo over- emphasized as they are tire 
corner-stones that lay very sure foundations for the practise of yoga. 

More so is the diet that is conducive to the practise of Yoga. 
All yogins have recognized the importance of taking in SBtvic diet 
fee the success of their yega. Says the Sruti — Aharas’uddhau 
satva truddhiif. Fcod plays a very important p«n in helping the 
aspirant to concentrate and meditate upon the Supreme Being. 
Experience has shown that neither an empty stomach nor a fully 
loaded stomach is good for the practise of exercises. It has also 
been pointed that neither a heavy sleeper nor a glutton can aspire 
to become a yogin as he has not got the qnalities required 
of a yogin. The author prescribes a diet for the beginners and 
enjoins that beginners should not strave. It must be borne in mind 
that success depends not upon the accumulation of wealth or upon 
the practise of Yoga with a desire to obtain the highest wealth 
or prc-cmicencc, but upon what one may call absolute economic 
independence. The less the desire lo have riches, the greater the 
chances of success. All riches tend to bind our min<is to luxury and 
luxurious living' which again will act as a check to the practise of 
Yoga. A perfect yogin is one who has no desire of his own to be 




KKV1EWS 



123 



fulfilled ami who is perfectly indiffaronl to tku personal possession of 
wealth. Sn abo is the desire fur yngir power*. 

The author lm* done immense service in attaching the illustrations 
to the various postures in yr«ic .rxamr* ami the effects, of each one 
of them. The graded extreme* are very helpful ones without which 
it bo difficult for (be would -ho students to proceed further. The 
description of the Ku>yl,dhii itakti with tire illustrations of the 
Cairn will interest students physiology and Psychology. The 
Srrami has done all that could Ixi done in the matter of guiding tho 
aspirants and has also sufficiently warned tliem of tho consequences 
that attend tmrsons swerving from the right direction. The book 
deserves to bo road by all and would surely profit the render, to 
whatever walk of life ho may Itckmg. 

A. N. Krisijkan 

Immortality, by Count Hermann Keyaerllng. Oxford Univer- 
sity Press, 1938. 

Tho sub title for this lx»k is “ A critique of the relations be- 
tween the process of Nature and tho world of man's ideas." This 
sub title explains in brief tho subject of the book. Tho main titie 
of the book is likely to give an impression that it is a treatise on 
the religious significance and meaning uf the term immortality. 
Keyserling is a scientist whom natural inclinations moved on from 
the field of scionco to that of philosophy. The view point taken 
in this work on the problem of immortality is that of a philosopher- 
scientist. 

The book is divided into seven chapters and in these seven 
chapters the subject is dealt with under the six headings of (l) Im- 
mortality in General, (2) The Thought of Death, (3) The Problem of 
Belief, (4) Duration and Being Eternal, (5) Consciousness, (6) Man 
and Mankind and (7) The Individual and Life. 

The first chapter explains the problem and makes the point of 
view of the author dear. Here the author finds it possible to have 




124 



THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



a critique of immortality in spile of all the disparity and incom- 
patibility of the ideas about it, since these ideas are all fcased on 
the common presupposition that the life-force which rules man does 
not coincide with its material substratum. 

la the second chapter it is shown that death is not really 
the end but is the condition of life. Imagination demands the 
superman and therefore with death the mere man becomes lot us 
in imagination a Deity who continues to live and influence. The 
third chapter sets forth a critique of belief in general. Belief is the 
supreme expression of knowing and always relates to the premise. 
The essence d a premise or assumption is certainty and as such 
relates directly to its existence or Being. Such an ultimate premise 
is the Ego. Belief In immortality is not however a function of the 
mind which cannot he further deduced like the Ego. Therefore it 
must have a positive ground. Ths positive ground is here the Ego. 
1 experience my Ego immediately as Function, Activity and Force. 
Therefore it knows no spatio-temporal limitations. Self. conscious- 
ness in other words coincides at bottom with the instinct of 
immortality. 

In the next chapter the author shows that life is never at a 
stand-still. Life is perpetual change. But man is conscious of 
himself as a permanent being in the midst of change. This eudur- 
:ng consciousness of identity relates to a supm persanal element 
while the conscious individuality is involved in perpetual change. 
Combining the conclusion of the las! chapter with this we find that 
the self which is an indeterminate, non-temporal, noa-spati&l force, 
is not identical with our changing person. The permanent being 
is a Non-Personal. SiDce the ultimate fact of consciousness has 
nothing to do with the personal, there is no personal immortality. 

The fifth chapter tells us that consciousness does not belong to 
the essence of life. It is only one of the many qualities of life. So 
the meaning of life lies in itself. The meaning of the Supra-Per- 
sonal Self is the theme of the sixth chapter. To possess a sense 
of duty means to recognise something which points beyond the person. 




If I live for an idea I do »i Iwrnnw to liv lliis end is for me a 
condition of life, an obligation. Tims ns wn piwlrutc inln uurxelf 
we find in the self a uiiiviixil Su|tia-IVrwHinl which coincides with 
juuhind or even the wntkl of life. 

In the liust chapter the author files from ntisinir life examples 
to prove that there is nothin# ended individuality (in the limited 
sense of the term) In tho organic world. Knch animal sacrifices 
itself to maintain live whole. Su also, man's immortality consists 
in his beiim a link hi the chain nf life. The individual holds in 
himself the totality of life in so far as he is tho result of tho past 
and the potential store of the future. lie die* so that life may go 
on eternally. And life an force rocs on irresistibly and consciously 
over the death of individuals nr persons. Hut what is life ? It is a 
mystery we cannot comprehend. 

I'rom this brief summary of tho contents of the work it would 
be found that the author has made a very original approach to 
the subject. The success of the book lies not so much in its 
convincing nature as in is* thought-provoking nature. The author 
takes the render into a world which would have ever remained to 
the latter an absolutely unknown land otherwise. When I was 
reading through the hook, I felt occasionally that perhaps the 
many concise statements that one so frequently meets with in the 
book axe far more valuable than the book itself as a whole. 

The book was written originally many years ago when the 
author was young, and at the time of the second edition some 
years later the author in the Preface says that he has chan god so 
much from the time when the book was originally written that he 
was feeling himself a stranger to the work and undertook the second 
edition in that capacity. But at tbe time of the third edition he 
had returned to the original state of being when he wrote the hook 
and edited the work for the third time ns his own pet contribution 
to philosophical literature. 

The English translation of the work by Jbdc Marshall is a 
very welcome undertaking and all lovers of philosophy and all 




126 



THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



who have an instinct for knowing things of the world beneath the 
surface owe a great debt of gratitude to the translator and to the 
Oxford University Press that has published the work. 

EnrTOR 



Burmese Drama, A Study with Translation of Burmese Plays, 
by Mating Htin Aung, PH. D. (Dubl.). Published by the Oxford 
University Press, Indian Branch, 1937. Pp. viii, 258. Price Ra. 7-8. 

Originally prepared as a thesis for the Ph. D. Degree of the 
University of Dublin, the author covered a wider ground under 
the title A Comparative Study of Burmese t pith English and 
European Drama . In the book under review, he has omitted 
some portions dealing with English and European drama. This 
pioneer attempt to study tho growth and development of the drama 
of his own native country by Dr. Aung is the first careful and 
detailed study of the subject so little worked up hitherto, in a 
presentable form. Apart from the too dose resemblance which 
the author sees or supposes between the early English dramatic 
foems und those of Burma, to which every leader may not subscribe, 
the author deserves to be congratulated for the careful way in 
which he has gathered his information from the traditional accounts, 
oral and written, as well as from the other sources. For tho firs: 
time, we get, in the book under review, a somewhat connected account 
of the Burmese drama written by a Borman deeply interested in the 
subject. It is somewhat stange that a bcok of this type published 
by the Oxford University Press, should lack a Bibuography 
which is usually found at the end cf all scholarly publications, as 
it serves the purpose of not ooly indicating the nature and range of 
the works consulted by the author but also might serve as a guide 
to future workers in the same field. One result that may he 
expected from the publication of this work is the creation of a new 
impulse to the study of the subject and to bring out authoritative 
editions of the dramas. 




REVIEWS 



127 



The book connixl* of eight chapters including the Introduction, 
la tricing the development and the growth of literary forms of 
composition in Burma the author notes that the drama was fairly 
Ute in its appearance in that country. " The first real Burmese 
drama appeared, though it had its origins come decades earlier, 
only towards the close of the eighteenth century, and during the 
next hundred years it <lovelo|K>d and then decayed." It is further 
noted that M JJurmoso dramatic literature developed in a historical 
sequence and in a way essentially similar to that of the Elizabethan 
drama '* (p. 6). 

Six stages of development arc noted as: (1) upto 1752 A.D. 
comparable to the English miracle play ; (2) from 1752 to 1319 A. D., 
the period of the interlude similar to the English morality and 
interlude -and the court drama; (3) from 1819 to 1853 the penod 
of U Kyln U ; (4) the period of the poet U Von Nya, 1853 to 1873 
A.D.; (5) the period of decadence 1878 to 1886 and lastly, (6) from 
1886 to the present day. For the earliest period, the most difficult for 
research, tradition is the only source. The recorded notes of the author’s 
father has helped him considerably. The revival of the dramatic 
performances by the grandfather of the author as Chief admini- 
strative officer of Mindon in 1852 preserved to a certain extent 
the traditions in the family (p. 9). The origin of the Burmese 
drama is to be found in the Nibh atkin. The festive occasions 
furnished the opportunity for enacting some shows which wero first 
puppet shows oumicing animals. The worship of the Nats or 
spents, which survived the re-introduction of Buddhism in Burma 
in the eleventh century* retained the spirit dances which became 
elaborate with the elaboration of Burmese music under its pagan 
kings. 

The NlBKATKIN which Dr. Aung considers as the equivalent 
of the English miracle play was extremely popular and it 
contained on demerit of humour in the person of the down who 
began to appear as a regular feature. There then came into 
existence a special class of professional dancers who, as they were 
5 




THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



social outcasts, found it easy to move from the old meetings to 
develop a new method of entertainment. These professionals 
became acton in the interludes. Side by side with the interludes 
which were one-act scenes at the commencement and were very 
popular, the drama was also becoming increasingly popular. The 
conquest of Siam in 1767 A.P. brought in new ideas which arc 
noticed in chapter two. In the meantime Dr. Aung criticizes the 
theory of Sir William Ridgeway pointing out that as a poineer in 
the field his estimate of the Burmese drama is a shrewd one. 

The Siamese drama was based on the RumUyana which was 
taken to the court at Ava, when the former were conquered by the 
Burmans. Tbc Burmese court patronized men of letters, and during 
the days of King Bodawpaya (1782-1811 A. D.), there arose a courtier 
aud accomplished mao of letters later on known as Minister 
Mynwaddi and the author of Beirut ng the plot of which is based 
on the Siamese original Aindrowunlha. The success of this new 
play paved the way for the two later dramatists U Kyin U and U 
Pon Nya. The court drama reached the common people by the 
formation of travelling companies which camped and acted the 
plays throughout the country. 

U Kyin U, "essentially the dramatists’ dramatist" (p. 68), 
was a real son of the stage. His plays are not far removed 
from the actual facts of life. His three plays of Dayvagonban, 
Mahttw and Paraphein arc considered to be well-written and 
well- conceived. The last is his master-piece. Comic characters 
arc absent from U Kyin U's works. His women- characters are 
mostly undeveloped and even the one well-developed female 
character is unsatisfactory as too little is seen of her (p. 71). The 
dramatic situations and the handling of tbc plot are not in 
certain respects satisfactory from our point of view. A king can- 
not claim to enter the cloister as a matter of right at any stage as 
in the case of Zayathein ; or it may appear ridiculous as in the case 
of Daywagonbon. With all this, it must me recognized thru it was 
U Kyin U who first laid down the chief doctrine of the Burmese 




NFVIKWS 



120 



dramatic technique — the development of tlic plot. The *|nrj may 
1 * borrowed or invontml, lml it must unfold itself in a clear, logical 
aod natural manner, without hiding anything from the audience 
(p. 71). 

Tbc next Croat dramatist worthy of consideration is U Pon 
Nya, who, besides being a dramntisl, was utoeped in full into the 
intrigues of the court, 1 le leaped the consequences of such a 
conduct by lieinj; secretly executed by one of the governors because 
the junior wives and women of the court of that governor took 
more titan an ordinary interest in tlj« comforts of the dramatist. 
The Paduma, The W tiler-seller. The Wizaya, The Kawthaia 
and tlie Witylhmuluyti are the dramas considered here. Of these 
the Kiru'tlnilx is the only play where the story Is original. The 
rest have been imrrowod from the Jnhtbtrs. As a courtier, the 
plays of U Pon Nyn wore meant primarily for reproduction 
a! the court, lie only carried on the tradition of U Kyin 
U. Romance is missing in the plays of the former, while U Kyin 
U was a romanticist On the other hand, in portraying character 
U Pon is certainly on a higher love! than U Kyin U. The two writers 
were equally anxious in the perfecting of dramatic forms. Both 
the writers have expressed political opinions in their works. With 
U Pon and his socrct execution, the days of the Burmese drama 
entered its decadent days. 

The decadent period from 1866 to 1877 A.D., being a penal of 
transition in matters political, was primarily one of distress. The actors 
were the only people into whose hands the torch fell. With the settle- 
ment of the country soon after the British conquest and the return 
of prosperity for the country, scholars in the country tried their 
hand or the production of plays. This culminated in the History of 
Thatton by Say* Yaw in 1877. This immensely popular work was 
repeated ail over Lower Burma. The Baboon Brother and Sister 
of U Ku, an able musician and composer, embodies an original 
story. It rivalled in popularity with the History of Thatton and 
20, COO copies were sold in a short time. Here the main interest 




130 



THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



drops, as the rest of the book is devoted to further stages of the decadent 
period. The professional actors reigned supreme in the field of 
dramatic entertainment, and unhampered by critical scholars, they 
followed their own ideas of what a dramatic performance should be. 
The improvement was in the stage scenery and the use of better 
lights. The people themselves neglected the old plays. As the 
years wore on, the later dramatic performances differed widely from 
the old, and at the most, could only claim a distant relationship with 
che drama of U Kyin U and U Pon Nya. 

The twelve Appendices contain translations of extracts of the 
plays mentioned in the text (pp. 151 to 251). 

A passing mention has to to made of the reference in page 121 
which states : 

" The great contribution of this dramatist (U Ku) to tho study 
of Burmese drama is his annotated edition of the Rama play, 
published in 1881.” The footnote adds below " An extract from 
this play is given in Appendix xi.“ But the extract referred to. is 
from Tin Baboon Brother and Sitter. While congratulating the 
author on the measure of success which he has attained in the prepara- 
tion of this book, the want of a BIBLIOGRAPHY is a desideratum which 
the author must fill up, at least in a second odition of his Burnt t se 
Drama. 

A. N. Krishna* 



Pounders of Vijayangara, by S. Srikantaya, Demy 8va 
Published by the Mythic Society, Bangalore, 1938. Price, Inland 
Rs. 5 ; Foreign 10 sh. 

The results embodied in this monograph contain a course of 
five special lectures delivered under tire auspices of the Annamalai 
University in October 1930, and a paper on Vidy3ra>/ya and 
Vijayar.agara read before the Mythic Society, shortly after the 
delivery of the lectures at Chidambaram. These were redelivered 
in a popular form at Bangalore and Mysore, at the request of the 




REVIEWS 131 

authorities of the Mysore University, a year Inter. Retaining the 
original form of clalivory, the author lnw incorporated tlio results of 
tbe investigations of the varlww scholar* in the some field, since 
hi* lectures. 

Vijayanngam history has boon particularly attracting the atten- 
tion of students of South Indian History for a long time. The 
Department of Indian History of the Madras University has made 
valuable contributions to the study of this period in particular, 
bath in tho post and in recent years. The vast range of the 
available material has occasioned the wiling of a large number of 
books on the period. No finality has yet been reached on several 
important questions which still invito the attention of investigators. 
Says Smith : "It is a mnttor for rojict that no history - of the 
Vijayantignra empire in the form of a readable nnd continuous 
narrative embodying the results of specialist studies, after critical 
sifting has yet been written." Even to-day the charge remains 
unfilled. The work of Robert Sewell focussed attention to the long 
neglected subiect of the history of Vijayiuragara. and in spite of the 
large additions to the volume of historical studies on the period, a 
complete history remains still a desideratum. 

The monograph under review investigates into the problems of 
the foundation of tbe Vijayanngara empire and of the real founders of 
the empire. The part played by the sage VidySragya whoso name 
is traditionally connected with the work has been refuted and 
defended by scholars. Mr. Srikantaya investigates this question 
also. Whether the rulers of Vijayanagara carried on tho work of 
Ballala III or were the feudatories of the Kilcatiya* or of Karapih, 
or whether they were commissioned by the Sultan of Delhi to act as 
his subordinates and win back the south — these are some of the 
main topics investigated by the author. 

The first two lectures deal with the condition of South India 
leading to tho chaos out of which arose the kingdom of Vijayanagara. 
On the north-west the Yadavas of Deogiri . . . were on the 
line of the Narmada, and on the north-east, the KBkatiyas of 




132 



THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



Warangal a subordinate Muhammadan kingdom could be said tohar 
invasion from ihe Bengal side Rnd the Central Province*. The 
Hoys'alas had to bear the biunt of the defence. In the south were 
the P*!3dyas feeling the pressure of the Muhammadans. Under 
Tughlak the horrors of Islam waned and the Hindus learned the 
folly cf discord. Out of the chaoi of the southern kingdoms rose 
the Empire of Vijayanagara (p. 33). 

The exact date of the foundation of Vijayanagara is still a 
matter of conjecture. A poet of the twelfth century,Hanhara,ment:oiis 
the YirupSksa temple. Dates ranging from the fifth century are 
given, but what is certain is, that the place was sufficiently important 
to warrant its selection as the capital of an empire. Mr. Srikamaya 
believes that Vijayanagara lay in the Hoys’fila dominions and was one 
of the provincial capitals of Ba’laln III under the name of Hosa- 
pajtana. Ho thereby anticipates the justification of the theory of the 
Kaiarese origin of the empire. Passing under review the various 
t henries of the origin and rise to power of Harihara and Bnkka, !ho 
author states his belief that BallSla III must have greatly assisted 
in the foundation of the Vijayanagara empire (p. 63). Basing his 
argument on Vijayanagara being situated in the Kuntala Dee's as 
Bukin is called Kur.tala Bhtlmi Psla by Gangidevl, he concludes 
that Ballala III was mling from Vijayanagara. In 13+2 Ballflla 
resides in Vtra Vijaya Virup&kgapura identified by the author with 
the bter Vijayanagara (p. 69). Vijayanagara was the centre of 
the Hindu effort in its attempt to protect and preserve the Hindu 
religion. This undertaking of Ballala was readily supported by 
Harihaia and Bukka. This is the view of the author according to 
whom the rulers of Vijayanagara only continued the traditions and 
the work of the Hoys’ala rulers (p. 72). All these require more 
evidence than has been given. Rejecting the theory of Muham- 
madan overlordship, Mr. Srikamaya cites the account of Perishto, 
from Father Hcras, of Ballala III convening a meeting of his 
kinsmen out of which tho foundation of Vijayanagara was one o! 
the results {p. 79). According to Dr. S. K. Aiyangar, Harihara 




Kli VIEWS 



133 



u>d Bukka wore the warden* of llm Mim-hcs in ihc north, the most 
prominent and rctq*.iisilile of tin- relation* of HnlUila. The arguments 
o l Dr. Venkatajumiuinyya are bn night under scrutiny, only to be set 
aside as insufficient. 1 1 mi hum was onthraued by HallUa nnd made 
MahEmmylnlcifvnr.i and vr.ui Ibraugliout loyal to his master. The 
agree ment of the Binulii* between the I loyn'Otis nnd the successor* 
of Harihara is adduced as ;ui additional testimony for the Knnarcse 
ctigin of tbo enqdro. Ill is is to forgot that suicessors take the titles 
of their predecessors for more lliao one reason and that the theory 
cf the latter being a feudatory of the predecessor is not necessary 
in all cases. There arc instances where conqueror* have succeeded 
to the titles of the conquered just to please the conquered subjects 
as a measure of solidarity. The celebration of the festival of the 
empire in the heart of the Hoy&'ala dominions in 1346, the visit 
of Harihara to SVifigcri, these arc taken as indicating nn atmos- 
phere of friendliness with Rallflla III. Hariham was the lord of 
coe of the many capital* that Balllk kept all over the frontier to 
stem live tide of the Muhammadan invasion. The transition from 
the Hoys'akivs to the rulers of Vijayanagara was peaceful and was 
probably due to lack of baits as both BallSla III and his son 
predeceased Hnrihara. 

The part played by the sage VidyArar.ya is the next serious 
topic covering nearly sixty-five pages of the book. While tradition, 
literary sources and the accounts of foreign travellers refer to 
VidySriujya there is little internal inscriptional evidence whose 
authenticity is not questioned. According to Father Ileras, many 
early record* do not refer to hint at all. Gopinatha Rao holds the 
same view when he siys : " The tradition of the founding of the 
Empire with the help of the Vedantic sage Vidy&rwjya does not 
Mem to receive corroboration from the cpigraphic evidence." (In- 
troduction to Sladhuravijayam, p. IS). Further, the author strongly 
pleads for the acceptance of the traditional account as to the part 
of the advaitic saint. To tho contention that the city itself was 
named Vidy&nagaca, after the sage, it may be answered that the 




134 



THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



name VidySnagara was perhaps a later corruption. The MaJr.wa- 
vijayaut, a contemporary work meotions the name of the city 
as Vijaya. While the same work mentions the name of KriyS* 
s'aktiguru as the family preceptor no mention is made of the sage 
Vidyariujya- Th«» strange omission is significant. The identity 
of the sage with MSdhavamantrin, MadhavficSrya, Sayaga and 
others are described in detail acd the author concludes that 
Vidyaragya was influential in his days and took a prominent part 
in the revival of Hinduism. That the other leaders of religions 
thought co-operated with his endeavour and that Harihara and 
Bukka were all devoted to SYingeri. The connection of Vidyaragya 
with Sringeri Mutt is still uncertain, if we go only by the accepted 
inset iptional evidence and the tangle of the identity of MadhavB- 
cSrya and VidySragya is still unanswered to our full satisfaction. 
One result is that the confusion of Midhava-Sfiyaga and Sflyaga- 
Yidyfiragya is not now made. The problem is still open for 
investigation as the final answer is yet to be satisfactorily given. 

The book under review has given much details of discussion 
and new matter. But while a large part of the matter is old, the 
need for a full Bibliography is paramount which the author has 
failed to add. He has tried to give a new orientation to old facts 
and has examined the available evidence with great care. It is 
a valuable conribotioo to Vijayanagara history- 

A. N. Ksisknan 



Mouumenla Niponica: A half-yeaily Periodical published 
from the Sophia University, Tokiyo. VoL I, No. 1, 1938. 

This is a very’ welcome member of the family of Oriental 
Periodicals. As the name of the periodical shows it deals with 
the cultrue and civilization of Japan. In the Aims and Objects 
of the periodical it is stated that it " persues a two-fold aim. 
Primarily it hopes to lay open to a wide circle, chiefly composed 
of American and European readers, the rich treasures of Far 




REVIEWS 



135 



Eastern culture, emphasising especially the typical values ol the 
Japanese tradition. Al the same time it desires to unice those 
scholars, both of the Japanese and of the several European national- 
ities, who may be interested in the many aspocts of the Far Eastern 
Culture." 

This is not a general Oriental Periodical. Its scope is limited 
to certain aspect of Oriental scholarship. It is a periodical of 
«p»a!ued interest, the interest of Far Eastern culture, especially 
toe culture of Japan. Our own Bulletin is more or lew of a 
similar nature, being specially devoted “to lay open to a wide 
circle, the rich treasures of the Adyar Library." 

This i s a substantial volume of nctirly three hundred pages 
and contains contributions from a large number of scholars who 
are specialists in the subject. There are general articles, some 
translations and some brief notes- There is also a section ir. which 
books and periodicals are reviewed. Tho articles are in Erglisb, 
French or German. From tbo fact that the "Aims and Objects" 
are published both in German and English and not in French, it 
is presumed that it would he predominantly an English-German 
periodical. But 1 find a speck of French also in the official pages 
of the periodical in so far the terms " The Chief Editor ” and 
“ The Publishers " are found in nil the three Languages- 

The Chief Editor is Prof. Dr. Johannas B. Kraus and it is 
published by tho Sophia University, Tokiyo. The periodical will 
appear twice every year and each issue will contain about 240 
pages. The subscription is 4 Dollars per year (inclusive of postage). 



Editor 




9999999999999 91999999 919 



OUR EXCHANGES 

Adhyfltma Piakfis'a. 

Andhra S&hitya Pin sat Patrika. 

Annals of the BbRndarkar Oriental Research Institute, 
Poona. 

Annals of Oriental Research, Madras University. 

Archiv OrientSlnf. 

Aryan Path. 

Bh&rata Pharma. 

Bh&rata Mitra. 

Buddha Pnibha, Bombay. 

Bulletin ot the Museum of Pine Arts, Boston. 

Bulletin L’Ecole Francaise D’Extrfme Orient, Hanoi, 
Indo China. 

Bulletin of tho New York Public Library. 

Cochin Government Archeologist, Trichnr. 

Director of Archaeology, Nizam’s Dominions, Hyderabad. 
Eastern Buddhist, Japan. 

Federated India, Madras. 

Hindu, Madras (Sunday Edition). 

Indian Culture, Calcutta. 

Indian Historical Quarterly, Calcutta. 

Indian Review, Madras. 

Indian Social Reformer, Bombay. 

Inner Culture. 

Jaina Antiquary. 

Jaina Gazette, Ajitashram, Lucknow. 




OUK EXCHANCES 



137 



The Journal of the American Oriental Society, New Haven, 
Conn,. U.S.A. 

The Journal of the Andhra Historical Research Society, 
Rajahmundry. 

Tbe Journal of the Annamalai University. 

The Journal of the Benares Hindu University. 

The Journal of the Bihar and Orissa Research Society. 

Tbe Journal of the Bombay Branch of the Royal Asiatic 
Society, Town Hall, Bombay. 

The Journal of the University of Bombay. 

The Journal of the Greater India Society. 

Tbe Journal of Indian History, Mylapore, Madras. 

The Journal of the K. R. Kama Oriental Institute. 

The Journal of the Madras Geographical Association. 

The Journal of Oriental Research, Mylapore. 

Tbe Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society, Bombay. 

The Journal of the U. P. Historical Research Society, Lucknow. 
The Kalaimagal. 

The KarnSjakn Historical Review, Dhnrwar. 

The Karnfi[flka Sfihitya Pari^at Patrikfi. 

Le Monde Oriental Uppsala, Sweden. 

The Maharaja'* Sanskrit College Magazine, Mysore 
The Mtmimsa PrakiU'a, Poona. 

The Missouri University Studies. 

The Mysore Archffolcgic&l Scries. 

The NSgarl PracirinI Patrikft, Benares City. 

The New Indian Antiquary, Poona. 

The New Review-, Calcutta. 

The New Tiroes and Ethiopia News. 

Tne Oriental Literary Digest, Poona. 

The Philosophical Quarterly, Amalner. 

The Poona Orientalist. 

The Prabuddha KarnSpaka, Mysore. 

The Progress To-day, London. 




138 THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 

The Quarterly Journal ol the Mythic Society, Bangalore. 
The Religions, London. 

The Rama Varna Research Institute, Trichur. 

Tlie Saimkrita RatnSkara, Jaipur. 

The Samskpta Sihitya Parisat FatrikS, Calcutta. 

The Sentamil, Madura. 

The Shrt, Kashmir. 

The Suddha Dharma, Mylapore. 

The Thcosophical World, Adyar. 

The Thcosophist, Adyar. 

The Udy&na Patrika, Tiruvadi, Tanjoro District. 

The Vishvabharati Quarterly, SbanrinikcUn. 

Tho World-peace, Calcutta. 

The 2. D. M. G. 



RELIGIONS 

The Journal of the 
Society for the Study of Religions 



Edited lor the Executive Committee by P. Victor Pishor 
President ol the Society 

The Most Hob. Tux MAKguasa op Zetland. P.C., G.C.S.I.. G.C.I.E 
Chairman of the Executive Committee : 

Six E. Dikison Robb. C.I.E.. Ph.D. 

Application for Uimbtnhip should b* t+nt to: 

Tmk Hon. Seczxtaiy, 

2#, 8«cklaxul Creeceat. Hampstead. 

London, N.W.3 

Membership Subscription 10/- per annum 



Pnr.ted and pablUbed by C. Sabbamyudu, at the Vomit P rest, Adyar, Madras. 






MASTER PASSAGES FROM THE WORKS 
OF DR. ARUNDALE 

The following passages from the writings of Dr. Arun- 
dale. President of the Adyar Library Association, are 
an appropriate corollary to the article which we pub- 
lished twelve months ago depicting him as “A World 
Personality." We offer these selections not as a garland 
to him, but as a garland from him to the rest of the 
world. 

The Life Magnificent 

In every aspect of life there arc innumerable and 
easily discernible magnificences — easily discernible, that 
is, to the discerning, some of the first magnitude, others, 
of lesser magnitudes, though I should not like to take 
upon myself the task of dividing magnificences into 
magnitudes. . . . The greater the height from which we 
view life the more overwhelming is the magnificence, 
and that which in terms of nearer view, of time, rel- 
atively, seems even ugly, will somehow or other 
wonderfully fit into the genera) magnificence — a shadow 
enhancing the splendour of the overwhelming light. 
From the standpoint of time, of the nearer view, rel- 
atively, no doubt we must become magnificent, we 




140 



THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



must change the sordid and the ugly into the glorious. 
But be assured that in terms of Eternity this is already 
done. We have in fact but to become what we already 
are. We have but to resolve, for by our very resolution 
the shadow is resolved into the substance of the essence 
of which it is, the so-called darkness is resolved into the 
light, the ugly in time is seen as the beautiful in Eterni- 
ty. Thus is the process of evolution a process of resolu- 
tion, a process of will, both for the Universal Lord and 
therefore for all that is of Him. He wills, and by His 
will is matter resolved. Let us resolve.' 

Mountain Grandeurs 

1 have contemplated grandeur in the microcosms 
of the vegetation, of the plants and trees and rocks, 
and in die ascending macrocosms of hills, of peaks, 
of mountains, of ranges, unto the consummation of 
Gaurishankar Himself. These mighty Himalayas are 
a living witness to, a living reflection of, the Buddhic 
and Nirvanic planes — and doubdess of still higher 
planes, for aught 1 know— according to the nature of 
our identification with them. 

Only in the Himalayas, and in lesser degree in 
other ranges, may the Voice of the Silence be heard 
in something of its majesty and power, uttering the 
Word that opens the doors between the Unreal and 
the Real. 

I perceive that Buddhi reflects for us down here 
the Eternal, all-pervading Silence, while Nirvana opens 
' References are at the end of the article. 




MASTER PASSAGES FROM DR. ARUNDALE 141 

to oar ears its Voice. We catch in Nirvana a syllable 
of its utterance. In the far-off future we may hear a 
Word ineffable. And then, perchance, a sentence. Some 
day, the mighty Language of the Gods ! 

This picture of the Himalayas and of their relation 
to these higher realms of consciousness enters strongly 
into my mind — not, 1 think, merely because they seem 
to be in some wonderful way the noble physical 
counterparts of these mighty inner regions, but for 
another reason which is very elusive, though 1 feel I 
have the key to it in the dim memory of the supreme 
wonder of the summit of Kailas a. I can see myself— 
I do not for the moment notice in what vehicle— on 
that summit, sensing the mysterious and awesome 
silence, the penetrating cold, the utter aloofness, the 
wondrous potentiality of manifestation, from the 
many shades of unutterable calm and peace . . . 
through growing unrest to the most furious, raging 
and cataclysmic storm. The air is alive with latent 
power, and I stand awestruck, humbled, reverent. Here 
at the summit there seems to be pure potentiality, 
relieved from time to time by manifestations of peace 
and storm. It is not what I see and feel that awes 
me, but that which is beyond all sight and feeling, that 
which is held in leash by the Logos Himself. 

I find myself merging in this might}' mountain- 
consciousness, and 1 find an almost terrible sense of 
omnipotence. It is almost overwhelming ; it would 
be quite overwhelming did I not suddenly understand 
why the experience is accorded to me. I realize the 




142 THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 

intention to be to disclose to me the splendid inevita- 
bility of the triumph of evolution. Swept up into these 
vortices of glorious majesty, I know at once that the 
supreme freedom is to attain the unattainable, to be 
free to accomplish even miracles. But how can the 
unattainable be reached ? Surely there is a contradic- 
tion ? No ; for the unattainable is only unattainable 
in time; there remains eternity, and in eternity all 
things are possible. 1 

Kingship 

All are Kings in the becoming. ... To all 
must come the Crown of Kingship. . . . Coronations 
have vital and personal meaning to us all. 

Just as in the outer world a Coronation is the 
supreme consecration of a royal personage to the 
Kingship to which he is called, so is there a wondrous 
Coronation when the human pilgrim at last achieves 
Kingship of the human kingdom, to enter into tne 
citizenship of the kingdom beyond. And stage by stage 
as he approaches more closely to such Kingship, he 
wears, as a sigu visible in the inner worlds, a coronet 
of increasing splendour — till at last upon his head rests 
the Crown of a King, a coronet unfolded to its perfect 
expression. 

It is certainly true that most members of the 
human family have still some distance to travel before 
they reach the point of being able to express in their 
very physical bodies accurate reflections of their coming 
Kingship. But the reflections are there, and the wiser 




MASTER PASSAGES FROM OR. AKUNDALE 143 

the education the more quickly will come the dawning 
of the kingly splendour. 

You do not merely learn of kingship from the kings 
of men, you learn of kingship from the kings of the 
mineral kingdom, the vegetable kingdom, the animal 
kingdoms around you. Wherever there is kingship, 
there you can learn from it. Enter then into the king- 
ship of your physical heritage wherever you can, drink 
in all its splendours and the majesty of its reflection 
of God's guidance and so stimulate that guidance in 
yourselves. Among other things, draw near to our 
Mother Earth, rejoice in her, take her near to you, and 
she will help to give you your heart's desire.' 

Fire-Pillars 

Wc are thankful to be born in these times, for so 
are we able to carry on the traditions of our elders— 
themselves soldiers of the dawn, fire-pillars in the dark- 
ness shining forth on to the Way lo Light. Those who 
made Theosophy safe for the world, cherishing it in 
strength against the offences of the ignorant : they 
indeed were, and are, soldiers. Those who gave to 
The Theosophical Society its present impregnability : 
they indeed were, and are, soldiers. 

Thanks to them, and to H. P. Blavatsky our 
charioteer, the fire of Theosophy sends forth flames 
and conflagrating sparks throughout the world, while 
The Theosophical Society, through its organization 
and individual membership, helps to make the world 
combustible. Today the fire leaps into flames and 




144 



THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



sparks as in days gone by, but otherwise. Today the 
life of The Thcosophical Society is strong, though there 
might be a strength even greater were each one of us 
still more one-pointedly ardent for Theosophy and 
The Theosophical Society. 

Our traditions arc of steadfast burning loyalty. 
May we hand on to those who shall cotne after us tradi- 
tions no less pure and strong and fiery for the reason 
that we too have been faithful to the end.* 

The World Needs A Renaissance 

For my own part 1 do not think there will be 
war. Perhaps the nations arc more afraid of war than 
of anything else, for they cannot see its outcome. 
But even if I am right that there will not be war, 
there must be something. Something must burst. The 
Real, the True, the Beautiful — these cannot much 
longer remain submerged. 1 believe that they still 
live in the hearts of the masses, in the heart of each 
one of us. They must have their release. They must 
fulfil their function of sweeping torrentially away all 
the hardened crusts of ignorance and its concomitant, 
pride, which have solidified the surface. The world 
needs a Renaissance. The time for it is ripe. It is on 
the threshold. A change of heart, a renewal of Lite, 
is at hand.’ 

The Oriflamme of Theosophy 

Theosophy must be a working hypothesis even be- 
fore it becomes a matter of unchallengeable experience. 




MASTER PASSAGES FROM DR. ARUNDALE 145 

Why? Partly, of course, that we may live in 
ever-increasing spiritual abundance. We must learn to 
take hold of life more and more, and distil its nectar 
for our perfecting. 

But even more that we may send it surging 
throughout the world as the most potent of existing 
forces for the world’s Readjustment to the Good, the 
Beautiful and the True. 

The world needs such Readjustment. The world 
is dying for lack of it. It is the world's elixir vitae. 
We have it. We must possess it as we have never 
possessed it before, so that wc may send it forth as we 
have never send it forth before. The world has already 
been so helped by Theosophy, largely through The 
Theosophical Society, that it accepts, though it does 
not live, many Theosophical Truths. But all that has 
gone before is but a trickle, a stream. It is for us, 
seeing the world’s need, to make it a torrent. 

Yet unless Theosophy be torrential in our own 
individual lives, how can we send it torrcntially through 
the world? How can we produce torrents save as we 
ourselves have them ? 

First, then, a realization of Theosophy, through 
a study and seJ/-application of its truths, such as we 
have not so far achieved. 

Second, the spreading of Theosophy far and wide, 
both as the Science of Life and also as the supreme 
solvent of all human problems. 

We must take our Theosophy, the Theosophy as we 
ourselves happen to understand it, into the by-ways, even 




146 



THE ADYAK LIBRARY BULLETIN 



more than into the high-ways, of people’s lives. We must 
take our Theosophy into the nooks and crannies of 
dull drab living, where life urgently needs beautifying, 
even more than into the grand and fashionable pleas- 
aunces, where garishness so often takes the place of 
grace, and luxury the place of life. 

We must take our Theosophy into all places where 
hatred, suspicion and distrust are rampant. We must 
take our Theosophy into all troubled regions, into all 
regions where war is hard by, where tyranny is loose, 
where proud contempt is breeding blood and ruin. 

We must take our Theosophy a& an oriflamme, 
as a portent of Peace, Prosperity and Happiness, in a 
spirit of certainty, so that we radiate assurance and 
the sense of victory. We must take our Theosophy 
far and wide with all our hearts, with all our minds, 
with all our wills. Then shall the truth of Theosophy 
prevail, for in our very lives its power will be perceived.* 

REFERENCES 

' The Life Magnificent, 50-51. 

* Nirvana, 47- JO. 

' A Croon of the Gods, etc. 

' Presidential Address, Convention 1935. 

; The Theosophist, January 1937, 285-6. 

* The International Thcosophical Year Book , 1938, 28-29. 




EDITORIAL NOTES 

The Bulletin completes its second year with the 
present issue. It is time to review its work during the 
year that has just passed. In the matter of publication 
of works, the BhavasatbkrUnti Sutra edited by Pagtjit 
N. Aiyaswami Sastri is completed and is issued as a 
separate volume. Two other works completed by the 
Library in the course of the year are the Samgrahacuda- 
mapi of Govinda edited by Brahmasri Papijit S. 
Subrahmanya Sastri with an English introduction by 
S'rimSn T. R. Srinivasa Aiyangar and the Pratyabhijha- 
krdayam with English translation by Dr. Kurt F. 
Lcidecker. The translation of the Yoga Upaniqads 
is also ready and is to be released shortly. The 
Bulletin has been coming out on the specified dates in 
spite of the several difficulties in the way, for which our 
thanks are due, in no small measure, to the efficient 
co-operation of the Vasanta Press. 

A few changes have been introduced into the 
present programme for the publication of works. The 
first part of the S gvodavyUkhyB of MSdhava is expected 
to be issued ss a separate volume in the middle of 1939. 
Till then, it will appear in the Bulletin, in parts, as has 
2 




148 THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 

been the case hitherto. This will complete the first 
four adhyayas of the first Asjaka. The Samaveda- 
vyokhya will not be a regular feature for sometime to 
come, till the RgvedaxySkhyd is completed. The 
DevasvSmtbh3$yd will take the place of the Rgveda- 
vyakhya and a larger number of forms will be devoted 
to that work. The Sdmavedahhasya will then occupy 
a subordinate part and will get only two or three forms 
per issue. On the completion of the Devasvamibhagya, 
the Samavedabhnsya will become one of the main 
feeders of the Bulletin. 

The Library has never been particularly anxious 
about the financial aspect of the Bulletin or its publica- 
tions. Our Bulletin makes a special appeal only to a 
select few and the number of the subscribers has stood 
at the same level as last year. But it has evoked 
greater response from both Indian and foreign jour- 
nals ; and the number of our exchanges has considerably 
increased. We have Seventy Journals as exchanges for 
the Bulletin. Besides, the quality of the books received 
for review have kept the same high standard as 
last year. 

Others also have been kind enough to co-opcrate 
with us in the work of the journal. In conveying our 
thanks to all these we make particular mention of Pro- 
fessor Rao Bahadur K. V. Rangaswami Aiyangar for 
his hearty co-operation ; to Professor Suryanarayana 
Sastri we beg to convey our sincere thanks for writing 
a short comparative account of South Indian Saivism 
with the PratyabhijfiS system. This has been printed 




EDITORIAL NOTES 149 

as part of the book Pratyabhijnahrdayaih translated 
by Dr. Leidecker. 

Brahmas'll Pa*i<Jit S. Subramanya Sastri and 
S'riman T. R. Srinivasa Aiyangar arc continuing the 
translation of the next volume of the Adyar edition 
of the Hundred-and-Eight Upanisads, i.c., the Snmanya 
Vedanta Upanisads. The publication of this work will 
be undertaken as soon as the manuscript gets ready. 

Other works, which, BrahmasTl S. Subrahmanya 
Sastri is engaged in editing for the Adyar Library, 
arc the Sangitaratnukara with the hitherto unpublished 
commentary of S’ingabhnpJfla — I say unpublished, as 
only a fragment of the whole work was published at 
Calcutta in 1891 in a Bengali monthly journal the 
Arupodaya — and the Natya&Ttstra with photographic 
illustrations of the ahgika abhinayams. The collation 
of manuscripts for the former and the gathering of 
materials for the latter are proceeding. It is the 
desire of the learned editor to exhaust the available 
manuscripts to make his work complete. 

Our Library has also undertaken the publication of 
a series of works in Dkarma Sostra. The Vyavakoranir- 
naya of Varadar5ja, of which a sample was published 
in the October and December issues for 1937, is now 
being published as a separate volume by itself. More 
than half of the work has gone through the Press and 
it is expected to issue the book to the public by 
March 1939. 

An edition of the Kaladarffa of Xditya Bhajja is 
also under preparation for publication by the Library. 




150 



THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



The Assistant Editor of the Bulletin has undertaken 
to do the work with the collaboration Professor Rao 
Bahadur K. V. Rangaswami Aiyangar. The importance 
of the work may be understood by thfc respectful re- 
ferences made to it by the author of the Kalanirnaya, 
The Library also proposes to undertake a critical 
edition of the Vispuswrti with the commentary called 
the Kes/ava Vaijayaitil. This is the only commentary 
on that Sin ft i. While the bhti§yas of other original Sinflts 
have been published the commentary of this Smj-ti has 
enjoyed comparative obscurity. While the bha$ya of 
Medhatnhi for Manu. the Mitak$ara of VijfiSneffvara for 
Yitjnavalkya, the fragments of Asahaya for M nr ad a have 
all come to light, the commentary on the has 

so far been kept in the background. The comparative 
lateness of the work is partially responsible for this 
obscurity. But that can not be advanced as the only 
reason, as works of more recent date have come to light 
and have been published with greater gusto. Professor 
Rao Bahadaur K. V. Rangaswami Aiyangar and Mr. 
A. N. Krishna Aiyangar, the Assistant Editor of the 
Bulletin will collaborate in editing the Ke&ava Vaija- 
yantl. We trust that the projected edition of this 
commentary will satisfy the needs of the scholars and 
enrich the publications of the Adyar Library. 




REVIEWS 



SalitPallia-Briilimtn/aiu, Pact I, edited by Vedavis'firada 
Mimiims4ko9art A. ChinnMwumi Sostri, Vice- Principal of the 
College of Theology and Professor of Mimamsa, Benares Hindu 
University ; Kashi Sanskrit Series, Chowkhamba Sanskrit Secies 
Office, Benares, 1937, 

The Great BrShmaija of the White Yajnrveda has a special 
interest for scholars, just as It has interest for the vast body of 
people, who dwell north of the God Ivan and follow the Sukla 
Yajur Veda. It is not only the largest Brahmans in bulk, but it 
contains a very large number of legends, many of which are 
developed in PurSpic literature, l'he famous story of the flood, 
which occurs In many countries, is found in this Briihtnai^u. Its 
importance to the student of comparative mythology and religion 
attracted western scholars early, Weber brought out his monu- 
mental edition of the test in 1855, Eggeling published his 
translation, with elaborate introductions and notes, in tho Sacred 
Books of the East between 1882 and 1900. Macdonnel has no 
doubt that " next to the Bgveda it is the most important production 
In the whole ranee of Vedic literature". He has pointed out 
the source of legends used by poets like Kfilidiaa in this Brfthmaga. 
The revived interest in the Veda in Bengal was shown by the 
publication of Pnotfit Salyavrata Sam Miami's edition in the 
Bibliotheca Indies, with Styaga'* bha&a. The bare text has been 
reprinted in Bombay and Ajmer. The text of Weber followed the 
Mddhyandina recension, and Hggeling commenced one of the 
Kanva recension. 

To Indian students Weber’s edition is virtually inaccessible 
cm account of its high price; further, they need a commentary. 

3 




152 



THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



The demand is now partly met by the publication of the first volume 
of a projected edition of the BrShmapa, in the Madhyandina 
recension, with a short introduction and very valuable notes. A full 
introduction is promised with the next volume. It will be awaited 
with interest, as it will discuss many points of divergence of 
view between the learned editor and western scholars o: which 
wc have indication in the footnotes. 

The volume under teview comprises tlse first four lritpdas. 
The first two kfip^as deal with Dar&apurt}amusa % Agrtyddheya , 
Agnihoira, Agnyupazthava, PiqfapitfyajHa, X grays tjetfi, 
DdkftiyaqayajiUj, and Citturmdsya. In the third and fourth 
kigdas the Agnitfoma in its various elements 19 fully described. 
The special merit of this edition is that it is the work of an Indian 
scholar to whom the different sacrifices are not mere theoretical 
exercises, a knowledge of which is derived only from books, but 
is conversant with the practice and direction of vedic yajflas. 
Professor Chinnaswnmi Sastn enjoys great honour in KStfl as a 
profound MlmSmsaka and Vaidika. His collaborator Pandit 
Pattabbirama Sastri is his own gifted pupil. The result of their 
joint labours is the production of an edition of this very important 
BriLkmapa, which is a monument of scholarly accuracy and 
acumen, and is published in a usable form and at a reasonable 
price, within the reach of students of Vedic literature, and of the 
followers of the M Qdhayandina school. 

Professor Chmnaswnnu Sastn points out that the difference 
between the MUdhyandina and Kanva recensions disappear after 
a few chapters. A discovery of greater importance, which we owe 
to the circumstance that the editor is JaciU phneeps in his own 
Taittiriya-stfkha, is that the Batapaiha contains many passages 
in which it «6tablishes its own opinion a a against opposed views. 
Many of these condemned views are those of the Tailtirtya. The 
allusion to the tatter raises many important questions, which are 
reserved for fuller treatment in the promised Introduction. A9 
instances of such criticisms arc mentioned: Sat . Br. 1, 2, 4, 11 
which refers to T*il. Br. 3. 3, 2, 1 ; Sat . Br. I, 3, 2, 39 which 




REVIEWS 



153 



refers to Tail. Sam. 2, 6, 2; Sat. Hr. I, 5,3, 10 which refers 
obviously to Tail. Sant. 2, 5, 5, 1 ; Sat. Br. 2, 1, 4, 8 which refers 
to Tail. Br. 1, 1, 9, 9; Sal. Br. 3, ft, 3, 24 which refers to Tint. 
Sam. 6, 3, 9, 6. These are only a few of such instances, which 
tie all carefully noticed in the footnotes. 

Another admirable feature of this edition is the supply in the 
footnotes of appropriate references to the Vedic texts, which are 
a!Iuded[to in the BiEhmatjn, and the indication, where necessary, of 
paihabhcda between the text followed and that followed by com- 
mentators like Uvva|a (see p. 25). Parallel references toother 
Vfdas and Bifthtnagas. and the Shir a liteiature are furnished in 
abundance in the footnotes, to which one should turn to got some 
idea of the enormous trouble involved in the editing. In view of 
the sanctity attached to exactness of the most meticulous character 
in Vedic pawnees, editing Vedic literature demands a degree of 
accuracy and care which no other branch of literature involves. 
The impelling motive to undertake all that trouble willingly is to be 
sought not merely in the high standard of a scholar's life but in the 
living faith in the sanctity, which only those brought up in the 
tradition, like the learned editors, can possess. It is this, which, 
granted au equal degree of critical scholarship, will make a proper 
Pitrjtfif edition, like the one under review, any day more valuable 
than an edition lacking this essential. 

The full value of this important contribution will however be 
evident only when it is completed and the promisod introduction 
(MVm/ 43) is available. We trust we shall not have to wait long 
for these. 

K. V. Rangaswami 



Twelve Religions and Modern lift, by Har Dayal, pp. 250, 
Pott. 8vo., 1938, Modern Culture Institute, Edgeware, England. 
Price 2a. 6d. 

Dr. Har Dayal has founded at Edgeware a world association 
which has taken the title of the Humanistic Fellowship. Its claim 




154 



THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



seems to be to formulate a body of dcctriivcs which will fit in with 
rational views of modem life. To tho corpus of this creed the 
founder gives the name 41 Humanism," a term already appropriated 
for other views (e.g. Professor F. C. S. Schiller’s). The critics (and 
possibly the advocates) of the new cult sometimes refer to it as 
Dayalism. It makes the big claim, because of its " discriminating 
and comprehensive eclecticism M (p. 202) to be the 44 new gospel " 
which has come 44 to fulfil all the old dispensations." 44 Humanism " 
claims to be tolerant, and to accept what is capable of reconciliation 
with modem life and reason in all old creeds. In this aspect it 
presents a superficial resemblance to Thwsophy, but this is hardly 
more than superficial because it rejects a gocxl deal of the contcot 
of Theosophy and its methods, while the vigour cf its denunciation 
of what it disapproves of in other beliefs savours little of a spirit 
of toleration. It is definitely atheistic, and it is suggestiveof a grim 
humour to regard it as a thirteenth, and twentieth cent cry 1 religion.* 

The aim of the little book is to illustrate, and perhaps justify, 
the claim to discriminating oclccticism, made by Dr. Har Dayal for 
his cult. The review of the twelve religions beginning with Zoro- 
astrianism and ending with Positivism, which is attempted in the 
beck, is restricted in scope by their objective. He who hopes to 
Jind in the book a description or even an adequate criticism cf the 
tenets of other faiths will be disappointed. Dr. Har Dayal*s purpose 
is to show merely what be would pick up and reject in the older 
creeds in the construction of his own edifice of faith. What is 
provided is only a sort of source- book of Dayalism. The method 
of indirect presentation of its creed make it difficult to get a dear 
and coherent picture of the corpus of its belief. We can only 
gather from it some of the likes and dislikes of Dr. Har Dayal. 

We might begin by noting some of the ‘old and out- worn 
beliefs * for which 44 Humanism " has no use. Foremost among 
them stands the belief in one God. The Humanist “docs not 
believe in God of any type or variety " (p. 114). The belief is 
unsound philosophically, anil ethically superfluous (p. 119), Mono- 
heism 44 is a gratuitous calamity in philosophy" (p. 118), and it 




REVIEWS 



155 



h a* been "the sleepless enemy of science M (p. 120). Pantheism 
is only “attenuated monotheism " (p. 121). Humanism rejects 
nil doctrines of reward or retribution according to action (karir.a) — 
Christian or Hindu — , belief in the survival of human personality 
after death, corporeal resurrection (Christian, p. 151), ceremonialism 
(p. 151) all form and ceremonial — “ all mechanical mummery and 
buffoonery " <|x 196)— metaphysics (p. 213). image worship, caste, 
beliefs in heaven and hells, subjection of women, nationalism (" v« 
Humanists should cease to think and feel in terms of nationality " 
(p. 221), — meat-eating, tobacco, and drugs (p. 91), war (p. ISO) and 
militarism (p. 184). 

It would seem that among the primary articles of the creed of 
' Humanism " we should reckon atheism, pacifism, internationalism, 
philanthropy nixl vegetarianism. All these are ** rational," and 
necessitated by the conditions cf modem life. The 41 humanist M 
is a believer in the power of the human mind (p. 124) and the 
reaction of thought on the body <p. 122). He does not consider 
sense ^pleasure evil, so loop as it is not in excess !p. 127), though 
be would condemn the sensuous hopes of Islam (p. 184). Ac- 
cordingly, the cultivation of the bedy, personal cleanliness and the 
selection of suitable dietary from its effects on character and mind 
appeal to him (p. 22). Asceticism is bad though self-control and 
self-discipline are necessary (p. 132). The married estate is worthy, 
though celibacy for both man and woman can not be despised 
“ because Humanism must tap this perennial reservoir of ethical 
energy among young people." (p. 142). Humanism needs missionaries 
to diffuse its teachings <p. 144) and tbc celibate is the better missionary 
foe he & " like a balloon filled with hydrogen : It rises fast and far" 
(p. 142). Physical mortification, like that of the Jains, is repul - 
sive (p. 104). Isalm is held up for admiration for tbe simplicity 
of its creed, its democratic character, absence of race and colour 
prejudice, prohibition of drink and high ethics (p. 184). The love 
of beauty should be cherisbcd, and Sufism is praised for inculcating 
it and Islam arxi Judaism condemned for want of it. While 
Humanism approves of the family, its dislike of excess in any 




156 



THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



direction leads to condemnation of Confucius'* adulation of excessive 
filial piety; while the democratic bias of the Humanist condemns 
with equal vigour the philandering with benevolent absolutism by 
the Chinese sage (p. 36). Positivism is commended among other 
things for advocating the equality of the sexes (p. 232) but " freedom 
for woman -should not mean the freedom to make a fool of herself." 
(p. 235). 

The above are samples of the new modernised religion. The 
book, which abounds in them, is the fruit of much reading and 
thought, though it can hardly be said to be either a satisfactory essay 
in Comparative Religion or a product of adequate and precise, as 
well as unbiassed scholarship. The founder of even an eclectic 
creed can not be expected to divest himself of preconceptions and 
prejudices to which scientific scholarship will furnish no support. 
Evidence of these is apparent in almost every page of this little 
book, and particularly in the very superficial account of Hinduism — 
the religion in which the founder was born. The value of Dr. Har 
Dayal's religious synthesis and its modern character would not have 
been diminished by wider and more intense, as well as sympathetic 
study, and the cultivation of the spirit which give their value to 
such works as the Encyclopaedia of Religion and Ethics and the 
exhaustive penetrating analysis of Hinduism and Buddhism in the 
late Sir Charles Eliot’s great work. It is significant that neither ol 
these authorities finds a place in the bibliography which Dr. Har 
Dayal lias provided for his foil were and critics. 

K. V. Rasgaswasji 



An Eight-Hundred Year Old Book of Indian Medicine 
and Formulas, by Elizabeth Sharpe, Limbdi-Kathiawar (India). 
Published by Luzac ft Co., London. 

This publication is the English translation from a manuscript 
in Gujarati characters of the original which is in very old Hindi. 




REVIEWS 



157 



This book contains formulae of some Ayurvedic Medicines 
used on various diseases. It consists of eight pails and two ap- 
pendices of which the formulae are n ranged in the order of diseases 
in the first four ports while, in the other four, they aje arranged 
aocording to the nature of preparations namely, Powder, Pills, 
Ointments and Oils. Vaidyaraj Amritlal Pnttani, the Limbdi 
Court physician has helpod the translator in giving English and 
Latin equivalents for names of drugs and diseases. 

Though some of the names of the formulae are similar to those 
found in the standard works on Ayurveda, viz., Caraka, Su^ruta, 
Vigbhaja, etc., the ingredients seem to differ in many cas*9. 

The work of translating into English this ancient work on 
Indian Modtdoo is doubtless highly commendable ; but the prac- 
titioners of non -Indian systems of medicine, to whom the author 
throws out the suggestion that the recipes may be tried, would 
find it difficult to implement the suggestion in the absence of 
dtiailt for preparing the medicines which, however, arc not given. 
It is also not safe to select a medicine for use in a disease 
without a proper knowledge of the diseases, their causation 
and the appropriate drugs according to the system of Indian 
Medicine. 

As often said by MSh&mahopSdhy&ya Gananatb SeD, M.A., 
L.MS of Calcutta, the success of an Ayurvedic physician is due Dot 
to the charm of this or that drug but to his dear grasp of the 
Dosic derangement and his selected and well considered treatment 
of that derangement according to well defined principles of thera- 
peutics ; mere knowledge of formulae will not help the practitioner 
to try them on diseases and to know their efficacy. 

The English or Latin terms arc not quite appropriate in some 
cases. The word ‘ Delirium * is used as an equivalent terra for all 
sannipata Jvarams ; Kakta arSvam is translated as 1 profuse mens- 
truation ' while the actual meaning of the word is "haemorrhage from 
any part of the body." A serious mistake in the translation is the 
use of the word " Gcr.orrhea " for prameha. The word 4 ointment * 
is used as equivalent for " Ghrtams ; ” and from this it is argued 




158 THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 

that “ in India these ointments are eaten.” Similar inaccuracies 
occur io many other places. 

An iudex containing the names ol drugs in English or Latin 
and Hindi together with their indications in disease* Is also added 
to the book. 

The two appendices found at the end of the book give certain 
minor details with regard to weights used and methods of pre- 
parations, etc. 

M. VlSWBSWARA SASTRY 



Ayurveda Darvanam, by Papijil Narayana Datta Tripathi 
§addarSanatlrtha of !odor. Price Rs. 4. 

Vaidyaratna Captain G. Srinivasa Marti, B.A., B.L., M.B. & 
C.M. has stated in the Report of the Committee of the Indigenous 
Systems of Medicine published in 1922 that a study of the principles 
of SSdkhya, Vaiaaqska, NySya, etc., is to Ayurveda, what the study 
of Physics, Chemistry, Biology, etc., is to Western medicine, this 
he designated as the Preliminary Scientific study. 

The boob under review U as though it is ju*l to support the 
above statement. 

The author has proved in this, not only that the knowledge 
of darrfanas helps the student to understand Ayurveda well but 
also that all the six dars'anas are found embodied in Ayurveda. 
He has taken maioly Caraka a* authority for his attempt and 
proceeded on the basis of the Satra of Caraka explaining the forty 
four padas in Vimanasthinam (<wfg WfapflTfa) covering 

the knowledge of all the dars'anas. 

Tbe text is written in the form of sQtras with explanatory 
notes (wf tti). Though some may differ with the author’s views 
on seme points in the work, yet, on the whole, it is an excellent 
work for inclusion in the Curricula of Ayurvedic studies thioughout 
India. I congratulate the author for publishing such a useful hook. 

M. VlSWBSWARA SASTRY 




REVIEWS 



159 



Tht JaimitnyanyaytinOla ol MldhavacBrya with the NyS- 
mtUOvistOra, Part I, Kashi Sanskrit Series, No. 126. Edited by 
Pandit A. Ramanatba Sastri. Professor, Sri Venkatcsvara Sanskrit 
College, Tirupati, and Pandit Pattabhirama Sastri, Assistant Pro* 
feasor, of Miro&nsB, Benares Hindu University, Published by Jai 
Krishna Das Gupta, The Chowkfc&mb* Sanskrit Series Office. 
Became, pp. 4. 6, 2J6, and 40, 1937. 

The JaimintyanySyamaimnaltlra, a classic in MlniSnua, of 
the Vijayanagar period is a fairly well-known work studied by the 
students of MlmfimsS, especially tbe beginners. Its author Mfidlia- 
vf clrya mentions the name of Harihara and Bukka two of the early 
Vijayanagar kings. He also claims to have bscn a minister of 
Bukka. The first part of this work containing the first three adbyfia 
with the commentary' of Madhava himself, is being edited in the 
Kashi Sanskrit Series by two Paotfits engagrd in tho task of leaching 
the subject. N aturally , they have tried tc remedy, in the present edi - 
tion, those defects which they had noticed in the earlier editions, as a 
result of their experience ta teaching. The Notes which the joint 
authors have appended to the text in tbe form of explanations or 
tracing the Vedic passages to their original sources serve a very 
useful purpose. Tho modern appliances such a* the index of verses 
or the index of passages cited, have been carefully prepared much 
to the advantage of students and scholars engaged in research. 

As a text much studied by those interested in the MlmSmsC 
Sfistra there are several editions of the work. The earliest is that 
by T. Goldstuecker printed and published during 1865 to 1867 
on behalf of tho Sanskrit Text Society (TrObner). It is of 
quarto seize, and like all works printed in these years, its cost 
is prohibitive. The Calcutta edition of Satipati VidyabhUpuya (1916) 
is incomplete. Pandit Sivadatta Sarma brought out an edition of 
the work in Pcona in 1892 in the Anand&aiama series (No. 24). 
The Benares edition of the NyHyomBISviiara by Satyavrata 
Saml»ramin m the magazine Pratna Kamra Nandini has become 
scarce. The edition of Jivtaaada Vidyfisfigara though complete, 
lacks the modern appliances of research, ej., index of verses, etc. 

4 




160 



THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



The prime object of the present edition lias been to assist the 
students, especially the beginners. Short explanatory passages, 
wherever necessary, have been added m a simple style wily with 
this end in view. References to the parallel passages in the 
Taittirtya Samhita, wherever available, have been added while 
the Bh&$ya and the Virtika have given references to passages in 
other s'ikhas. The plan of the placing of the audumbura kusa 
in the Citr3dhikara>]a helps to clear certain practical difficulties 
in the actual performance of the stoma. 

The author has promised to discuss the question and 
identity of Midhavicirya on a later occasion after completing 
the priming of the work. Such a discussion is welcomed, as we 
trust it would help in solving some of the most difficult questions 
pertaining to that period. Tbe author of the present work styles 
himself as a Prativasanta-Somayaji, i.e., one who performs the 
Soma sacrifice every spring. The Anandas'ama edition and the 
Calcutta edition of Jivananda have this passage in the colophon 
while it is omitted in the edition of Goldstuecker. The telugu edition 
of the work in the Adyar Library also omits this title in the 
colophon. The significance of this tide would go a long way to 
establish that the author was a grhasta and not a sanyfisin. The 
omission of this part of the colophon in the present edition is 
significant. 

The question of the identity of MSdhava, VidyaraOya and 
Sfiyana has drawn much attention while yet no finality has been 
reached. The late Rao Bahadur R. Narasimhachar drew attention to 
the several difficult questions which had to be satisfactorily solved 
before accepting the question of the identity of Viyfirapya with 
Mfidhavocarya. The reply of Mr. Subramsnya Aiyar has left the 
question in much the same position. The several articles which 
have appeared since then, have Dot improved the solution of the 
tangle. May we trust that the promised investigation will go into 
the question fully and offer a complete and satisfactory explana- 
tion of the authorship of the work and exact relation of the author to 
VidyaraOya, MSdhava and Sayaija ? 




REVIEWS 



161 



Wc congratulate the editors and the publisher on their publica- 
tion and trust that the full work will be made available to the public, 
ero long. The services which the Chowkharaha Pres* has been 
rendering to the cause of Sanskrit Literature deserves special mention 
on an occasion like this. 

A. N. KRISHNAN 



Bhakti Yoga of Vivekanaoda, translated by Y. Subba Rao- 
Published by the Adhy&tmapiakls'a Kfiryfilaya, Bangalore City. 
Pages 16, 111. Price As. 12. 

The present work is a translation, in good and readable 
Kannada, of the Bhakti Yoga of Svami V-.vekacanda. The work 
is divided into twenty sections and places before the public the 
essentials of Indian philosophic thought of the Bhakti school. 
Based upon ovej sixty different works, the present volume makes 
clear to the minds of the reader the several phases of Bhakti Yoga. 
Svfimi Vivck&nanda, an advaitin by birth and conviction, shows 
how one should be tolerant to other systems of philosophic thought, 
by citing very often from works belonging to different ar.d even 
opposite schools of thought. It is possible to take objection to 
statements criticising those that are intolerant by declaring them 
to be worse than curs; and also to remarks like this, i.e., an 
animal, if it creates a god, will make it only a super-animal and 
nothing more. For we, human beings, have created geds not 
only m the form of human beings but also in the fora of the 
various other beings of creation, is, Matsya, Kurina, Varfiha 
and so on. 

The translation is in faultless Kannada and in intelligible 
language. The rendering of technical expressions is invariably 
happy and we congratulate the author on this small but important 



publication* 



H. Sesha Aivangar 




162 



THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



Vdkyavrtti and LaghuvBkyavxtti, translated by Y. Subba 
Rao. Published by the Adhyfitmaprakiii'a KSryalaya, Bangalore 
City. Pages 10, 36. Price As. 3. 

This is a free rendering of the Vahyavptti and Lagku- 
v Biyavrtti of S'ankaracatya in readable and cha3tc Kannada prose. 
The authM has appended short Dotes on technical vOttraic terms. 
The sources of the citations are traced in the appendix. The 
subject matter of the text is brought oat in a short and compendious 
form, and will be helpful in understanding the subject-matter to 
those scholars of Kannada who are not familiar with Sanskrit. 

H. Sesha Aiyangax 



AdhyatmasTlklintatijan of S'ivSnacda Sarasvati, translated 
by Y. Subba Rao. Published by the AdhyfltmaprakEs'a Kfiryftlaya, 
Bangalore City. Pages 6, 68. Price As. 6. 

The present work is a rendering in Kannada of the Spiritual 
Lessons of Sivinanda Sarasvati, originally published in the My 
Magazine. In forty-five sections the author shows that the truths 
of Vedanta could be understoed only by anuMava and not by 
mere study under teachers or through books. Yogic practices, 
dhySnas. Nirgm/a and Sagutja up/tsauBs and allied topics are 
well explained, so as to be understood even by those who do not 
know the philosophical texts. We congratulate the author on 
these three short and interesting booklets. 

H. Sesha Aiyangar 



Tirumurukariupadai, edited by N. S. Ramachandra Aiyar, 
B.A., L.T., Muthialpet High School. Madras- Pages x, 33 ; 1937. 
Price Annas 4. 

The little book under review is divided into two parts, the 
former containing a preface in Sanskrit, a study in English and a 
U&ttam in Tamil. In the latter part, the text is printed side by 
side with a paraphrase in Tamil. The poem is ascribed to Nakklrar 




REVIEWS 



163 



one of the great poets of tho S'artgam Age and the President of the 
Third Snngani. His courage and faith in his own convictions were 
proverbial. The story goes that he refused to modify his opinion 
about a literary composition brought to him, in spite of the threat 
of Lord Siva himself to open his third eye. 

The poem treats of the famous places of pilgrimage of S'ri 
Subrahmaijyn ; of these, six are of importance and they are treated 
in the book. Beginning with Tirupparanltumam near Madurs, the 
author takes his route in the prtidakfit/a kratua. Tintccndur 19 
the next shrine described. It is situated 36 miles east of Tinnevelly 
in the Tinnevelly District. It is significant to note that the name 
of the shrine is given as Tiruclralaivai. In later times, the name 
Tirucendur is held to have been derived from die name of a 
Paqgyan Icing Jnyantan. The presiding deity here is ^aqmukha 
with twelve hands, each face and hand having a particular function 
assigned to it. 

The third of the series is T iruSvitutH Imfi — or modern 
Pazhaqi. It is held that Lak^ml, Kftmadheno, the Sun, the 
Earth and India worshipped Subrahmaijya here. The mtrfi here 
it DavSdiiUva distributing favours to his devotees. Tiruveraham, 
the identity of which is somewhat in dispute between Udipi and 
Svimimalai — as both are equally held to be identical with 
Tiruveraham — conics next. Muruha is here the Gun i explaining 
the orthodox form of worship. The Iasi of the series is Aiagarkoi! 
near Madura. The book concludes with a few stanzas under the 
name Tout Venbilkkaf, as a separate section (pp. 28-9). 

Mr. Ramachandra Aiyar, as a devotes of S'ri Subiahmaqya, 
has, in his English study, appended his personal roethed of approach 
to the god. His Tamil paraphrase will be found to be cf great help 
to the large numbers of the devotees of §aqmukha. The explana- 
tion of tho difficult words in pages 31-3 will be found useful 
and appreciated, as not all could understand the poems of the 
S'ahgam Age. 



A. N. Krisk 




PPPPPPPPPPPPPP ???????? 



OUR EXCHANGES 



The AdhyStma Praks&. 

The Andhra Sahitva Parijat Patrika. 

The Annals of the Bhandarkar Oriental Research Institute 
Poona. 

Annals of Oriental Research, Madras University. 

Archiv OrientSlnl. 

Aryan Path. 

Bhftrata Dharma. 

Bhoratn Mitre. 

Buddha Piabha, Bombay. 

Bulletin ol the Museum of Fine Arts, Boston. 

Bulletin L'Ecole Francai9e D'Extrime Or-.ent, Hanoi, 
Indo China. 

Bulletin of the New York Public Library. 

Cochin Government Archaologist, Trichur. 

Director of Archeology, Nizam's Dominions, Hyderabad. 
Director of Archaeology, Baroda. 

Eastern Buddhist, Japan. 

Federated India, Madras. 

Hindu, Madras (Sunday Edition). 

Indian Culture, Calcutta. 

Indian Hijtor.cn! Quarterly, Calcutta. 

Indian Review, Madras. 

Indian Social Reformer, Bombay. 

Inner Culture. 

Jaina Antiquary. 

Jaita Gazette, Ajitashram, Lucknow. 




OUR EXCHANGES 



165 



The Journal of rise American Oriental Society, New Haven, 
Conn., U.S.A. 

The Journal of the Andhra Historical Research Society, 
Rajahmundry. 

The Journal of the Annamalai University. 

The Journal of the Benares Hindu University. 

The Journal of the Bihar and Orissa Research Society. 

The Journal of the Bombay Branch of tho Royal Asiatic 
Society, Town Hall, Bombay. 

The Journal of the University of Bombay. 

The Journal of the Greater India Society. 

The Journal of Indian History, Mylapore, Madras. 

The Journal of the K. R. Kama Oriental Institute. 

The Journal of the Madras Geographical Association. 

The Journal of Oriental Research, Mylapore. 

The Journal of Parapsychology, Duke University Press. 
Durham, U. S. A. 

The Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society, Bombay. 

The Journal of the U. P. Historical Research Society. Lucknow. 
The Kalaimagal. 

The Karuajaka Historical Review, Dhaiwar. 

The Karnataka Sahitya Parisat PatrikS. 

Le Monde Oriental, Uppsala, Sweden. 

The Maharaja's Sanskrit College Magazine, Mysore. 

The Mlmlmsi Prakfis'a. Poona. 

The Missouri University Studies. 

The Mysore Arch*ological Series. 

The Nlgarl Praciriul Patrika, Benares City. 

The New Indian Antiquary, Poona. 

The New Review, Calcutta. 

The New Times and Ethiopia News. 

The Oriental Literary Digest, Poona. 

The Philosophical Quarterly, Amalner. 

The Pcona Orientalist. 

The Prabuddha Kamfljaka, Mysore. 




99it9i99tiiWiii 



166 



THE ADYAR LIBRARY BULLETIN 



Progress To-day, London. 

Quarterly Journal of the Mythic Society, Bangalore 
Rama Varma Research Institute, Trichur. 
Religions, London. 

Review of Philosophy and Religion. 

Saijiskjita Ratnakara, Jaipur. 

Soqi9kpta S&hitya F'aritjat Patnkfi, Calcutta. 
Sentamil, Madura. 

Shrl, Kashmir. 

Suddka Dharma, Mylapore. 

Theosophical World. Advar. 

Theoeophist, Adyar. 

Udyfina Patriki, Tiruvadi, Tanjore Diitrict. 
Vishvabharati Quarterly, Shantinikctan. 
World-peace, Calcutta. 

Z. D. M. G. 



Printed and published by C. Snbbarsyudti. at itie Vaunts Pr««. Adyar. Madras. 








153 



1. t-3:^] 



| |1% WTOfowfelRl I 

*r atn\s»raif^ ^3:' i flfet ft’aift *toeN*flfd i 

faftStegs' ww *wfaK*qwisn* i arft =* wt- 

SNtS* I 31Tft 3l^K | am ftrffaRWcqf^ || 



3icg & I #sot?i: Rto: 3mm?g: foyift itqsnft Snftfo 
nma^fi i aft =a at?j gt-ra aiaftfflt acg fe^pj i g 
3S*>ft ftaSwaift Sara ll (^o) 

3 iW: , cfR ^ 1^3 ^ 1 3 ^ dr ii 

aiq: | aw: I SFT^ | q$q aRT4jq'S4|0||^ I 

*R 3^ 3TRT3 I f^t ^ I SCT.' | a't'Tt oftq^ 
$ ZZH? I 33^:’ TOTFlfftfa' II 

aiq: i m: ^qagqsyiori siting g GHmjra.1 

sb $m\\ (*t) 

' Read »F3; 

’ 91 mostly worm-eaten. 

' Read miffi «t fr*ii$i. 

1 R mostly worm-eaten. Read OT&ftnff, 

1 Read *£H . 

' The lead above the letters 3^ wtfh worm-eaten. 'The letters 
slightly injured. 

' R<*d m- 

? Read 

* The derivation in Nirnkta is *tH 3 I OT W^ft *ft*TT: I 

There is no such root in the Dhhtupfitba, which has only cQ 
(8. 1) and <0 (10. 296.) 




154 






[*. *• * 



5 ^ 3 : ^53 ^ fftfl *lW I 

^ 5ft f'li'i^H. !• 

^ I ?m: q^nwra I JPWR: | UfaflgW 1 

*rft I Stf'Tci Wi. I a?stiq^o?: s fc*T- 

fa*l: I 33T | ar^T^’ + + <RRfa I 

b^vto 5 ^ II 

f^n: i & £R®w. *'R i ra 'jfarc J i f7 >%i i ^ •n*^ 

rdstpj: pjaif^q: irfvtgats | 35! ^IWhcWgtPl I *p 5 3Wi 

II (V() 

5TNf ?Wli~talft3 ^TPfft I 

an itf| 3 51 ^3 II 

^ Wiaifa* I 3TTT' #> f BTfiT fPR: | VmX'Q 

' Read flfNfwffw. 

' Read 

' After two syllables are completely gone, the leaf being 
worm-eaten. The H mark preceding the consonant for the Erst 
syllablo is in tact. The second must he a, the end of tho tail beir« 
seen. Probably what was written was SOTWfel and to 

be read afjoHwW 

‘ Read anal Wt or g'litTsft*’. 

“Read Wjl. 




A. t. ^8] ntvrafm 155 

apra? i ?a 3 »e a *n to *ra toi i qa? 
f^: II 

3ffl «*$ fafV jfjjoqrq. fa. *. R*. *) 

I 



aTI-TT 3RJ | 3?qi -q «irh: I 333 <^R- 

q^Rg^wl: wife: I ‘tortflPTs® I d Pi rt 

to ^ fem *ft II (\\) 

9 4f3 ^TT 93 9 ST35T WMI^TT I 

3^ |*T fto3? II 

a *n I a 9 a a pre «ra toi i 9 psqr i ««ng»n a 
*n o»i'fl^?«ir a?’ atftftftra* ii 

« *nrt I to *to ffatotft: l a m ^nwn asfig: ii 

m 



*ja 4viM^4i*ifil:ii n-fe^ art |^Fg art i 

•tt af 5UT arfert .^ifea! a ?5rt 5^ a II 

1 Read JJ^ ftfa. 

* *TT mostly worm-eaten. 

1 B mostly worm-eaten. 

* Here there is the figure 4 to mark end of the Snkta. 




156 [«J. 3J. ^ 

5 W: Ot si. *. ?*) fft aiwrogwS** I 

a* y^'it $ *13: TTT^ifte:' 5 i^'WHIPifV PiMWc. 1 

g-rftfci i aw* sraiwN i as *: srw jfli 

3TWJI «T3Wi a WT SSfiT I 

ft qoSlfs f?W 3T TUB • (^. *. ». »*. R) 

51 ST 53$ 5^: « (W. *o. ^ *) 

ffti i aw 1 ga 5'j.i'fl‘i i 'MAW ai^apii a«i a' aars? 
<j«iWi*i* i ^15 s tfs ,b i ft m g*^ I gdV 1 g?wi 
i i ftai ^ *na? 

s i arossragsm i wtoftfa mft 

sW* i s*r*«na^RwRi«toi aif*a“ 

1 Read ofiipft*: 

* Read 4<*J'rtJi|'Tl(ti. 

' Read ftRaftcdRi. 

1 Read awn 

1 fa glWi 9^ ; here there is a long hole in the leaf above the 
letters, the leaf being worm-eaten. But the letters are only very 
slightly affected. 

‘ Read WPiftBi 
'Road «R. 

't not wanted. 

8 Written first 5STCTTRT ; then the 3TT mark In Jn scored oU. 
"Read gw. 

"Read JRft. 

“ 0 portion in worm-eaten. 

" P- 8. 1. 59. 

" Page 18. a ends here. 







157 



*• ?. ^8] 



fra 1 *m*: a i m‘ ^t»,n 3* f^wi i 

3?f^^8t<l ^sqfsgsreiftft %v*\*mi ?f% n 



wi ^ 5 tW:^r. i «: tor tfl natift g^ri I isufi 
^Rf ijsiJ fj*q ?TWi •TR a'jgf .’Wiq: 1 7i iRTqftr. gtijwuq 
g^fo ^3 I ^55 maiRwfl I5^»i n (?) 

3T3^3 ^q^r^lHT 3T*f I 

7T H*n sifW g«tei%\^ 3 T5H Ptf ^ ii 

«i J H: | 3 ^HlR f^lf^RR 3&3RT gETR a I 33 3^5*®^3 
WJEcRI^ 33lf^R$ | RTRR- 

ti'tl'il't | 3131 3 SUWrR:' I RWT: 333* I 

3 R*W W3* ljf% || 

1 fra mostly worm-eaten. 

* Read | wg^lTl m 

' 3 mostly worm-eaten. 

' Read ^g^lWH.. 

1 It is not certain if it « $m or -pro. Only the bottom half of 
the first letter is clear. The top portion is worm eaten and there is 
a Ions break in the leaf above the line ; no other letter is affectod by 
this break. 

1 After W25 till ^ the leaf is completely broken, far is 
completely gone. There is only a point in the first ^ of ?T in rtT{lf< 
visible. The text can be re-constructed from this. 

' It looks more like 511-^4. There ia only one small circle 
after 5*1 but there is a dot below it, 

' Read 93%: 

" What is found in Yaska’s Nirukta is SMH !f% l 5RPn 

«ffl. (*. \*<) 




158 



[«. a. ^ 

m' m\ 3thi* II (S) 

«ft ^ afagfolTa i a^aMfo? II 

a*ft | »T»ft»T% *TNW^ | ST i^T I 

o?r *r?t i ?f&3: rpi *HPfW vr^ i p?® apt* 

fawifwa* li 



fltfsraro q?MRi*ft$ i afcfrrara ^ I a aftap* 
gqaan: srfijsi ^ afta: f|%a i wfa rt i aflnNmfc ^3 

alaa: si sRFWtorf TOarasW aai a^T tfsgn: H {^) 

arafe. i pir w 3 ^t fa?: i *Rtatf4 n 

af«a. i afefe a ?ai aai aa wna: ajaaR; I 

SO fti' go i a&rtsatra: i oi^lorapfr ^ i 

a arafta?* n 



' ww wnsr *si. 

• feftar ^ 

* The reading should be flfttrftem arafaq | Perhaps the scribe 
wrote only Af-refr-THR. (*TT being extra) and left out Twfam. The 
last letter is not at all clear, being wcrm-eatea. a is only a 
conjecture. 

‘ Read BP1?. The letter <ft is worm-eaten. There appears to 
have been a | mark above < 1 . 

* Read «lTri. 

‘ Not quite clear. 

' Read fa: 

• Read Wnrft^. 




31>135*T 



159 



M-S: 5 **] 



q: APT 3^ | qfeffe | q (^fqgt 3T»i: 33>3 f^WRl 

Sfqftot PrP-^%^ gq*ta wigc^: s?*i W I ams 
pqw: II 00 



3'f‘T3*3 ^ 3*75^3 qqi^TT I «£lft IR II 



3333*3’ 333 3JJ3*3 3 | W53! *§j&t3 I 3333 

aA-Ji^: 1 #RR33:’ i *Jjn M #rrwre 4ka i 

f * tqfafofi^ I 3131 3T3T qKigftft | JFTCtftftl <£ + + 

W3‘ II 

3333*3 | 7l3 *3^3 333*3 33 33 ?<8%1 3531^ 3331 

m qwrwji II (<\) 

•rf? ^ 33 3 *t;i 3 g?5 q’teRpft qa^fra an^: 1 
frl 3ffqfg-i qirgT 3 ^ 33^3 3 f?3r 3 r^ || 

3% I 3f|^ «ft 6 33^ | 3 35: I agtsfa333T3*3*J I 3 
a=3 'UmiMR^'I*) 313*43 | qqt if^T: FJ3Rq)sfq | 
313: * I 3^31 qn<n siftftq 3733: | arfqftq: 333: aifRi3T- 

3T5: I 3 f| 3*3 Taf4tS%' 331 35R3: II 

1 3 following 3*i completely worm-eaten. 

’ Read sjqfroRW: 

•Read ^(=^ 15 ?). 

' After 1, there are two syllables worm-eaten. They are com- 
pletely gone. The second looks like «. Perhaps to read 'R'fcfflfa. 
' Read trf. 




160 



WwpqTWl 



[31. <. 31. * 



si ft ftw' gwJ (*. ?v) 

fenfowi %^To?re^’ i 

vftfti 7*i' <nfo (*b. *. ?®.. R) 

^ ^ i? «rapi *iftaftr fiflfct i aianjisa i 
7W: a l 3 n’£* |?lf^lcl*^W , ai^wf’ <rfa3Ta 

ViWjfd' || 



a ttRitfi o5TR l >(WW $ u% fagffls% i a*fg 3wia i 
« aw uara 3TO9K aa snufaWtai i aft a i aft aa sw 
srsafflwniwwl sifii afiwaa ^ a?<n Wa qaa?a: 
sraig: i a a jai siro: aaa ^3i: | a ^ ^ aaaitjai tnawft? 
«i5W nftaf^ i ($) 

f|a ^T 3^Tt Sjjl 2^ i 

##lt: ^Rft'gC 5^: II 



1 Read ftwft. 

1 5 mostly worm-eaten. 

* Read y*l 

' This must be tbo explanation of WW^. Perhaps to read 

str a®*a Vq. 

‘ The connection of this word is not clear. 

' Read Wig: 

’ W mostly worm-eaten. It is only a conjecture. 

'Read a^. 

' From Wig: the sentence is not quito intelligible. 




flT'Hfj'TT 



161 



«• ?•***] 



^3^ l 3^ *S? I *PTf& frlg^ i rrai 

SWT 4W iwfiqw cT3*H: | &4 ^ Wf\ I | 

^ *?RSfrt I Wim* II 



(m. y?. «.) i 

sft i «gwp* i mm - 1 ftsfa i 3^ 

|«t 't'ft tyftara. i a*n «Rt awM^Rftai: 1 %tra-. stsm^r: 

STF>TT: l tgftftl 3*l|traT^ II 

3*33 TRI | o-'Hlftql s^t trai &3ftT 3?*fi*S 

si gsss: i it ‘s ftgfci i 

^iiitsi *13 a'lR i?sfa i sfthifw ' ta | £ til'd 1'if^aifa *w?jj 

cSRift ll (va) 

3? ft TRT S$5 f Pn*F^5TT ^ I 

3?" faWl^ I f| t!4I SWSJSiR: 7 | I tpp? 



1 Read «<fl: raiTO: cf. N. 10. 33. 

' Read VTW»i: 

’ Read 

' Read ifWfoT. 

* Page 186 ends here. 

‘ The praiika is not separately given. 
' Omit the visarea. 

‘ Head 3*£: 

*1 




162 



| f^n: I 31^33 4<M ‘ ? 3 + +‘ 

Sift + +' | $3313 | Q$TO: 'fiNon’ I 3ti3»MTbiy 533T- 
ft*t: I 3R$f $33 ft^lft 9 Hd<W«lfafci a 333 || 

33 f$ I Rff*f|01 f| fT3T ^W*»+K f£Tr3 333$ q^jRq | 
aais 333 ra^t 3 ugft$ 53313. 'RiP' nfoaig \ 
«lsq E'-nfr-r. 3 >p<i q»:wi?45ftft 32jj ll (<?) 

513 % iWpJLT^: SSdjjfi Wkt ^ 1 

m4& $ Mft fa Ml: n 4 ^**H n 

5T3 £ | 533. I 5133fftft fc 533 | ^ 7T33 f*H*t 
3wft I 3?$ 3$f fftkl ftftT’nf 3iftT *fter‘ f333T I 

1 *9 In •% worm-eaten. 

1 <pj«: worm-eaten. Only a conjecture. The middle letter is 
completely gone. The other two are partly retained and can be 
made out. 

’ S' completely and t£ mark in % partly worm-eaten. 

‘ Not intelligible. Perhaps SRTSH^. 

* Alter i the leal is broken. 5 partly retained ; then about 
two syllables completely gone. Perhaps to read sPdRft instead ol 

3 * + + 

* Two syllables after Sjfit mostly worm-eaten. Perhaps 
EfojigJJ. 

' Not intelligible. 

1 Read t'l'Wffoft'- 

’ FilBt written TOT. Then W mark inserted between 91 and n 
below the line and the 3" mark after 3 deleted by a dot above. 

" Perhaps to read *ft*. Not clear. 




*irawffli 



163 



«■ 



I n# **!%' I TO$: 'K^fa* | 

*zft fij<fl+Hl I *m$:‘ I $?i f^: 

«33^Rra: I q?T: WTSftfo 4 || 



m % i ?T<i ^ *1^ fo?qifa a?s ^ i Mon 
«ft*n 5«ftKWRa i s swftra: ^ f* qri^gg 3r<^ i $g ^ 
m stftai sRi II ($.) 

3rt g wi T^n^rm i’TT ans ?£i ft fsf?% i 
3T^tf3 ^°TPT 5^ ^ilfrl || 

wft ^&n: <ra «n: i w ?fa *i' « I g<T ah 

| W?: 2*r^ flH'4: | qjfl- 
<fi!.dc'l[*g3pll?r *Rfl^T ^Tfc^* | ««!'% ^Tv?IT: | 

fitter i ^ ?sra B I iBffcjy I fanf^: 10 i 

1 The letters are not quite clear. This is only a conjecture. 
The last letter but one is partly worm-eaten also. Perhaps to read 

Ppfcft anffa. 

1 Perhaps to read . 

1 The Ms. is very comipt ; writing not clear. This must be the 
interrelation of Cf. N. 2. 7. 

* Cf. N. 11 . 21. 

* Read ?. 

*Cf. 3. B.2.1,2. ♦. 

r It is not clear wbat root is meant. Read instead of 
KJWH. Cf. W N. 3. 20. 

1 Cf. the S. B. section referred to in note 6 atove. 
u Perhaps to read OT*?!. 
w There is no 3q in the text. 





[«. ?. 3 T. ^ 

I I 'prifa I 

II: I I *1 3 ■eWtl i 

*U?°IW I 1 |K*ir«ll^ I 3 T 

foot PwftK:’ fllPR:' I aiT^fcl 

(I. in. *. R. ?o. 1) *ft 3 

aiflwftft ii 



; r^aifti cra^ % aifa fcai n’agfai | 
<wi ua\ i »rafa 3 ftai i aift 5151 ft 

fWH *raif*? 11 (?°) 

?Rt aw u ii ^^*ng^i sttf^ nsfarnT sfafir. 1 
fT^as *tt 5 3 n^: it $t*ft: 11 

9 t 3 I I cTf^T 3 T% W>n «MRM: I d^qlylW 33 * 1 - 

^ I *\*F*&miz net 35,3^ I W)M &VS- 

m-‘ Wt'ftftfa II 

f*l aifa 1 win? ararfa a^nw: 1 
apj 3 SfoJ^ST <M«wl ffaffl: I B ca'ajj^ aw 55 spng | 
<Kis Mgwt? ai «wnwg: sriM: tfa 11 ({ \) 

' Read The word «3W»: after RRW1: seems unnecessary. 
' Read ftwfart: 

' cf . ^ «ngi 1 ^ «. (ft. <»i. <•) 

‘ Read iftRffiftsF 1 ?: 

4 Read f*cS3Wt RltRI'Wi'l: 







165 



q. 

qftsfrii r ?? an ft ^ i 

gn:5lfr qq^roft: nt wsruthtt ^rt pto n 

aftn. i 3^^ i qftqra' s^napr- 

qprl «*t $?T*J ftajftft I wft fT^T RjTHfaiqq: | 

55iqft I A ^WhijMM.* q^S: 1T511 

^°T> 3*^5 II 

qfolffiq. l <ftq qiF affc! q® «4 WTOfa fai qTgflU 
?f?l I fi^a 42^1 =3 a?l qffl ftqll WTft SWT gfgqafa I 33 : 
gq:^r? q »ng5HF^» TOTT 3^: **qiq gqtrg ll (H) 

33:?© 4%} l 

afti Trar ^jj: y^ifssi ajrsft ft &qta; qraft. 11 

3^ ?ft‘ qftftP3rl[ 9fT I $$fcl WWT 
•na i arq a^sft jfftftft i qqig ftat ft^arfta fft" i + + 
^feroft* i »aPmqi i gaift ar 1 i tm-. w«rckT*$3q' ?ft 

1 Read f**W. 

* Reod^TT?^H. 

4 The ^ ia 3T*l and ^worm-eaten. It is only & conjecture. 

' There is ao pratika separately given. 

' Page 19a ends with $. Tho first letter in the next page is 
completely wenn-eatea ; fcl is only a conjecture. Sentence not dear. 

* After jfcf, part of a letter is seen ; cot decipherable ; then 
two letters are gone ; part of the 2nd is seen ; it may be Perhaps 
lo read ?fcW<I.I wfrfoofa or *filt %q: wSlfewfe. 

1 Reading uncertain ; not intelligible. 

1 Not intelligible. Perhaps to read qeft: wfcwWfSf. 




166 






[«• «. i 



g j R5fl: 1 I ®R S^3 ”TT^3 l 

If*:’ ^ I arf^: ®nfi^T:* I WT- 

ftft I 3*ti aRWm' 5*4 TRT «H»ft I toC 

m&Y ft*j 4 l^t iiyi^i' i ?fci 11 



^:frq: I »Z$n: fas ggsq tog 9 ?: 

«f^’- 3^ 1 a wrlsqgiig 1 fa?iqf|f*ra: qisiR. ftjpri^ 1 

TOlftto* <fi3 «9SnCT || (^) 

3d g $af ^1 qirffH^ g^lfrq? #$: I 

r%sF (i^-iife ftpw: ffnft 11 

sra 1 to?* aRfllfl:' i *m ?q’ J jtrtoV' I 

8 R + #: rf^: 1 * I I W" *t& *R?I: I 

' The explanation of tko word gfltipf is not clear. 

’ H m £H: worm-eaten. Read ifw: 

' fi{ worm-eaten. 



’ Read to, 

' Perhaps to lead Wftfojt. 

' ReadTHR. 

' Read am\. 

1 Perhaps to read 
" Read m. 

11 « portion in PC worm-eaten. 

" Between the too 9 syllables a letter is worm-eaten and not 
decipherable. It leaks like 5 preceded by two tr marks (to form the 
mark). Or it may be «T. Perhaps to read afiflj | 8R. 

“ Read sh£: 







167 



n. g. ^»] 



I 8^ 

qm^fifci it 



i **t 3«n^ a ^ 
3£fT TOW*, l 3&: %qf^on3T<t,* | 3§ «Tl| 
W *n«:‘ I ftnW: 



3^3 % %ss: I 
*ra 33 q|: 
qiqift ft3R13 



3Rut I ftwiw?ra 

333^ 313 WR ^)lft 

(t8) 



3^1 ffc*T qrsjquiim'^q ft q'-igq sfonT | 
a«j4ife^ tft ^hImh) 3lft<ft ^JTq II 

35tR^° | c^rfi’ 3$q TT5I 3^ftq' | Slftftqfa- 
iM* I 3w4q|3WWPI ,# | ftsKW” | 

1 Read 3Hrfesi'fi?£fiI , 

' Read JRJntf. 

' Read §mi>n3. 

' The passage is not intelligible. 

* What Ylaka says is : 3?g*T *?SOT: | wft** m i 

*mr saftfo stw? i s?w: ifft wfci i fa qp*s (ft. *. c) 

' Read^Wl. 
r Read 3*fa. 

1 Read 3*-*p*T. 

I Read tfftftflfafl'S: 

w Read 3PW TOW. 

II May be 

“ Read ftw. It looks as if there is some bit worm-eaten after 
H, and it may be a 3 mark following'. 




168 



[W. M. ^ 

m 5 m m i awiro: 

•»lWl|iH*l‘l*i$fel: | 3TfeTCS$ SiMJ WRl^dl Jjfe || 

3j£WH | 3W1 *»?JT Wii WWfl: qw«? fel*W 

mm wpw. i «a gs wrwifa% «?*qFP?Fnfe% *?i 

spngtfen aipi gfasq ?qiq a^m: ?r?g: n (\\) 



qfafe, I Mtqfe II 

qfaa i & qiq5T3T%g ^ q^^arat 5Htqi^ 
t,<rfci 3'*R D i awi^q-q^n' -5'B‘t i ir* fen i 
Bctw' ?P4T i fen slfr?n aigi 3^i ' i qnr nftnfe 
f&fe i ns^raff wm<| fffafa' i m *$fcwis*w<« 

1 Here there is the figure 5 (which looks more like ft) to mark 
the end of tho stfkta. 

* Read CH^f: 

1 Samayinukramai)! is the seventh of the twelve amikramaQjs 
written by the author. The twelfth is this commentary itself. Cf. 
the introductory portion in App. IV. of The Madras University 
Sanskrit series No. 2 pt. 1. 

1 Perhaps to read It looks as though something is missing. 

1 Read **ytn: 

1 Road 9 ft 41 4: 







169 



«?. ?• * 



safoift* ftw II 



qfefe i asa fl^R^M^^iRwJiia d<w«j§ f|?na: 
nwrai $1 i SjjKtwte fsfiiq^a^a a sa ll (?) 

m $ rail M±wi fas: i *n *p$ ii 

*n a: i aiwiargaw aia?<n 8 I fafteaw’ 
aa i fau: asiftft:’ 1 ht s s°naw i fa ?ei affaira 
OTa:' fatena) arcfar^' 0 i a»j *fatf|*wa 5ft 1 1 11 

ai ai aaiq 1 aiwiaig^rq «pw ta^jna a?i aa 1 «n =a 
(Piiaw aw* 1 f&nqtt para: 11 (\) 

1 Read 3<TOr*fta. 

’ The sentence is not quite correct. Perhaps to read W TCWtW 
3^TPP3 1 '*•'-< jfe. 

1 This is the sixth anukramog], Cf. reference given in note 3 
on p. 168. 

* Read ttfWft. 

* Read fa%. 

* Readmit. 

' Read f*&aWR(. 

1 Read TO 5tfl: 

1 Head f*TT»f: 

* Not intelligible. 

" Perhaps to read tffg: rflU: wfiwaH Sfa. 




170 [«. V. \ 

fa | inf T»ftr,g a «fat^ 1 #fi$rn tfmft ii 

ft I *255*r^‘ I ftfhft g^fpfal flRftfeft- 

wm. i <r *s5r’ *gfaft: ^ | MnO^ran $#w 

37^’ ^I5TR $$ *ft‘ s^sg^wjqi 1 31»nft: skfwi II 

ft saStaw | onft*?!fon«a as $s *r: igfiif*^- 
Wr: II (\) 

qTf ft »t faN*: I # * II 

ITT ft I st I'M Pci W ft 5 ^ $$$: ^tPJl 

*H I rn: $m pV SlRI^l W:' qggfoq' 
qg . . . wn*H ftftfa 0 n 

' Read gwfc: or it may be %. After the letter q is 

written aa<l deleted with a dot above. 

* The purpose of this word is not clear. 

’ Page 19 b ends with 57^. 

1 !ft mostly worm-eaten. The following two letters ate scarce- 
ly decipherable. O* 1 ?! is only a conjecture. 

’ This is the ninth anakramagl. cf. the reference given in n. 3 
on p. 16 $. 

* 0 and mostly worm-eaten. 

' Head w: 

‘Read TOflCT. 

’ After 5T, the letter q is half seen. The corner of the leaf is 
broken and two or three letters arc misng. is what begins 

the Dcxt line. The letter after is worm*«arcD and cannot be 
daiipbcrcd- ft is only a conjecture. Read TOftoNdtai I ftwiTfl- 
ftRftr Tho word TO .^ouW be added before TO 




\\] awa^i 171 

irifs i aiife *1 aa fafan gsa: ^'Ri aw 
naia oft qoaafia «wi af^R snara?aiaifa gqjreafca n («) 

5 ti sfcrfog w w toi? i n 

a^T i as a: «afri i a*o i a fori awaftg?? $4: 
af[ai i{BR a^&jRn 1 ai i $?aiat aP^'?a*lKi i n 



a^i yaftaaj 
agai 58RH. il 



i a^a 

aa^oi* arga i ftrai 



i a: safe i a^i a ^atf awafa*p $a: 

« 

!^ai h a i ^adaia Tig^ II 

rcTWtjaia* aaaaai-?l a aaiq + + 
aieaak srffH gfa‘ II 



afoaam i asrifoa «5m*®(r ffcsraaft anaaaiat i a -a 
troiqai 'prwa aaaiara awatei»5fnfa il ft) 



at €rt *nfcnn i & ara ; 



1 Head «g?Rre. 

1 Read «*lMt*i: 'rf^HT *%. 

' M alter gar mostly worm- eo ten. 

4 After SOT the comer of tbe !eaf i6 broken and a letter or two 
missing. a is what begins tho next line. $| U only a conjecture. 
Head TOTOT: 

4 Not intelligible. 




172 






[«. \.v. \ 



i smft^ift ft^' i i arerftw- 
fwwj: fltftft I WFa«RT?ft qrefi:’ I Sf'Sfwft'l 3T 
%3?1<T 1 sfafT <Ks^ll^ | R^GJT ft tiyjfo 

qaa: qf^oi: a mmm I aar wi* aw: Hg^3:‘ i 

s*ra aretfift agsift a?*i ssa a* g.srefiftft 1 n 
ft q«i? ^raa: ft. %. ?. *o) 

^ amq&reaftft n 



^sT q: l q: srar^ift ^-aR^i n^aai qftnni ^rejig^ra 
q^ HT5 q«Ra ^5 5 aw: agssr n's^tfl: l ag'sqiFg qaa: qftflJi: 
qqqfta fq^pqaiaw aw: a g aqiawre ftreiwiafaft ll (vs) 

ft? 5WT jt^ spfMg: i v ll 

M \ M $\ m: arena. 8 qi$: i >m\ 
fliai:’ i 3R9T aawa: jpre^^ana, i 5 aqanq^ 1 
5qR5Ttsft?T are: aa'ftft* u 

’ Whai is found in the Ninikta is ftRfdWift'tl*t^<l<IftH>»^H:(^.$). 
' cf. 3wfim qfaw i 3 rri ir wfii i w*o\*i ifti «i i ti/R*q*cr 

fiwrafii «t (ft. \. v). 

' This must bo or H. 

• Road qg&fl: 

‘ The passage is unintelligible and very corrupt. 

* The letter preceding is doI at ail legible, q? i* tbe 
nearest approximation. Read WSPl. 

' Not dear. Perhaps Wet 5WR. 

’ Read &? q q 

’ The word <FT*fl: not taken up in the commentary. 







173 



«. t- * *\1 



M m: i ^ ffwi «wi^gKF « n w if fr» ^ *% *ur% 

H3JPPIRR. ^afe|wlwg i HTWTR arf5mi« ^ %fr? II (<£) 

^ I fcf ^ TOT# II 

M I W 3PJ 3flft TO I *fcffoW I 

^ ^swii««^ ^n ftflft ii 



i ^ aram^ifTWR fo^floiw nja: i ^ 

^ wfq qift ftft 3T?JfHH II («,) 

ft •ftp? ^1^31 ^®T: 9^?T ^ I HIwftlPT II 

ftTOR* m UWI'Hlfo^M, 1 I S 5 *^ 9m‘ qqfft 
as) ^ 3Rni « # ^ ?^T: <iWMWi^ft^*»i*nfSft^ 
ifti *t®t sTTflrqi ft tor ?ft snsrprefaj sftsnr: T n 
1WI§ ^ $&!:' far. ? 0. v9) 

JTSfft fraft*WP* I ft?!: TR9T: ?ft a’ II 

'Road**. 

* Read H 

1 Pratika not separately given. 

4 It appears that a portion is missing. 

* After 91fT there is a small dot. It does not look quite like an 
nnusvfinu 

' h is worm-eaten and not quite decipherable. It is only a 
conjecture from the bits left. 

’ The passage is corrupt and not not quite clear, 

’Read TOT: 

* Not clear. 




f f 



174 [w. w ^ 

fomz. i « frflsfa *2 ci«pT >25OT ^ HrcisR 

gm: ii (?“) 

foNH^I r^fir^t 3fft 'fc’Tft I ^ifd *TT 2 *R^? II 

3RI: I WI^M, ft J 8T*nft l STT^TiPl I RF^ ft 
RPJ^W fctllft Rift ’tl^irt* %tS®RiPi || 



Rwfa I 

q^jf^l ^ i^*1 $<1lfa Rift ^ *&Rlft II 



m> 



H jfl g*.4oferfl: ?JWt WI I R 2 afl^fR RTf*R^ II 

fl R: | ft^ftfcl ftRTS: fl^TRRfa^* I 3fft RTipft: 
1^: WT?R: | ftWTS^WI-rfteM<*W I R3T 

ftw ftWl i* ?ft II 

ft&telft afcfa 3R ? (RS. %. VS. ») 

I WSR1H (JR^piftW: TO I RWRg’ 

’<lWH!<ifa 3*1^: RR4I4 || 

' Head ftvifJl. 

1 The word is not clear. 

1 Pratika not separately given. 

‘ Read WWW: 

‘ Perhaps to read S^rawfajuni . 

‘ R. V. 10. 32. 2. The passage isftWflf fowl: Page 20 a ends 
with ft*. 

’ The Ma. read aiHfl. Read 3Sq . 

‘ Read H3RJI3. 







175 



«. <• S; V] 



sftwM annftvi (’R. *t v. H- *) 
q or antnt' aifra^’ n 

I SRlRftfil* era | 3T- 

g im l *i l ^WF<nft ‘Iwri ^ 1 n 



« ^ faTO 1 WsraiR P3J*ift.ra: q*u ^ilg i 

swiCTi'jfa ^ sransg ii (\\) 

faforft ftra ^ ^ I ift rast ft ii 

ftsg i ftssTft uro** i ffcwran i 51ft 1 5 iw?ft- 
1 ^31«g ^irafei II 

sjfV Ararat (5R. %. <^. ^v) 

'tt'il qra 1 ftra 1 0 1 f%f3fPrf% raq- 

®n*n if* raw 1 raft” ^rarS : 1 qsjgwga rara% 

1 ft completely worm-eaten. 

’ Last pSda of tho stanza quoted just above. 

’ Read W*tf Ift. 

' R. V. 10. 186. I. Usually the commentator quotes from the 
beginning of the pada. The pada is «T<t WI 03 iftnq. Peraaps a 
bit is omitted by tbe scribe. 

* Read S>W3 
' Read ftSSSlft «**(. 

' Read Oft: 

‘ Read oft. The letter ft is worm-eaten ; yet it can be seen 
that wlmt was written is only ft and not ft. 

’ReadftftriCT. 

" Read ftffa ftffe. 

0 Read CTfti: